01a_tb_e7 R&S/R&S SMIQ Series 02B, 03B, 03HD, 04B, 06ATE, 06B Operating Vol 2 R&S
User Manual: R&S/R&S SMIQ Series 02B, 03B, 03HD, 04B, 06ATE, 06B Operating Vol 2
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 405
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Test and Measurement Division Operating Manual VECTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR SMIQ02B 1125.5555.02 SMIQ03B 1125.5555.03 SMIQ03HD 1125.5555.33 SMIQ04B 1125.5555.04 SMIQ06B 1125.5555.06 SMIQ06ATE 1125.5555.26 Volume 2 This Operating Manual consists of 2 volumes Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany 1125.5610.12-11 II SMIQ Tabbed Divider Overview Tabbed Divider Overview Volume 1 How to Use this Manual Contents Data Sheet Supplement to Data Sheet Safety Instructions Certificate of quality EC Certificate of Conformity List of R & S Representatives Tabbed Divider 1 Chapter 1: Preparation for Use 2 Chapter 2: Manual Operation 10 Index Volume 2 How to Use this Manual Contents Safety Instructions Tabbed Divider 3 Chapter 3: Remote Control 4 Chapter 4: Maintenance 5 Chapter 5: Performance Test 6 Annex A: Interfaces 7 Annex B: List of Error Messages 8 Annex C: List of Commands 9 Annex D: Programming Example 10 Index 1125.5610.12 R.1 E-7 Introduction on how to use the manual SMIQ Introduction on how to use the manual This operating manual contains essential information on commissioning, manual control, remote control, maintenance and checking the rated specifications of SMIQ as well as all specifications of the unit and available options. The following models and options are described in this manual: • • • • SMIQ02B – Vector Signal Generator 300 kHz to 2.2 GHz SMIQ03B – Vector Signal Generator 300 kHz to 3.3 GHz SMIQ04B – Vector Signal Generator 300 kHz to 4.4 GHz SMIQ06B – Vector Signal Generator 300 kHz to 6.4 GHz • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Option SM-B1 – Reference Oscillator OCXO Option SM-B5 – FM/PM Modulator Option SMIQB11 – Data Generator Option SMIQB12 – Memory Extension to Data Generator Option SMIQB14 – Fading Simulator FSIM1 Option SMIQB15 – Second Fading Simulator FSIM2 Option SMIQB17 – Noise Generator and Distortion Simulator Option SMIQB19 – Rear Panel Connections for RF and LF Option SMIQB20 – Modulation Coder Option SMIQB21 – Bit Error Rate Test Option SMIQB42 – Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA Option SMIQB43 – Digital Standard W-CDMA Option SMIQB45 – Digital Standard 3 GPP W-CDMA Option SMIQB47 – LOW ACP Filter Option SMIQB48 – Enhanced Functions für 3GPP W-CDMA Option SMIQB49 – Dynamic Fading Option SMIQB60 – Arbitrary Waveform Generator The chapters with associated contents are as follows: Data sheets list guaranteed specifications for the functions and characteristics of the unit and its options. Chapter 1 provides information on putting the unit into operation (AC supply connection, switch-on/off), functional test, preset settings, fitting the options and mounting the unit into a 19" rack. Chapter 2 explains the manual control of SMIQ. It contains front and rear panel views, describes the control elements as well as connectors, provides a short introduction with sample settings for first-time users. It also explains how to change parameters and the use of the list editor and gives an overview of the menus for the functions covered by the unit and its options. It also presents the functions and menus of the unit and its options (frequency and level setting, analog and digital modulation, ARB, external modulation source AMIQ, fading simulation, noise generation and distortion simulation, BERT, sweep, LIST mode, memory sequence and general functions not relating to signal generation). 1125.5610.12 R.2 E-7 SMIQ Introduction on how to use the manual Chapter 3 provides information on remote control of SMIQ. It informs about basics like IEC/IEEE bus, RS-232C interface, interface and device-dependent messages, command processing, status reporting system etc. It also includes an overview of each command system and describes all commands available in the unit and its options. Chapter 4 informs about preventive maintenance and functional tests. Chapter 5 contains information on how to check the rated specifications (required test equipment, test setup, test procedure) and on the performance test report. Annex A provides information on interfaces. Annex B contains a list of SCPI- and SMIQ-specific error messages displayed by the unit. Annex C provides an alphabetical list of commands. Annex D gives programming examples for remote control. Index provides the index with entries in alphabetical order. 1125.5610.12 R.3 E-7 SMIQ Contents Contents 1 Preparation for Use ............................................................................................. 1.2 1.1 Putting into Operation........................................................................................................... 1.2 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 Supply Voltage ......................................................................................................... 1.2 Switching On/Off the Instrument .............................................................................. 1.2 Initial Status.............................................................................................................. 1.3 Setting Contrast and Brightness of the Display........................................................ 1.3 RAM with Battery Back-Up....................................................................................... 1.3 Preset Setting........................................................................................................... 1.4 1.2 Functional Test ...................................................................................................................... 1.4 1.3 Fitting the Options................................................................................................................. 1.5 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7 1.3.8 1.3.9 1.3.10 1.3.11 1.3.12 1.3.13 1.4 Opening the Casing.................................................................................................. 1.5 Overview of the Slots ............................................................................................... 1.6 Option SM-B1 - Reference Oscillator OCXO ........................................................... 1.6 Option SM-B5 - FM/PM Modulator ........................................................................... 1.8 Option SMIQB11 - Data Generator .......................................................................... 1.9 Option SMIQB12 - Memory Extension to Data Generator ....................................... 1.9 Option SMIQB14 - Fading Simulator FSIM1 .......................................................... 1.10 Option SMIQB15 - Second Fading Simulator (FSIM2) .......................................... 1.12 Option SMIQB17 - Noise Generator and Distortion Simulator ............................... 1.14 Option SMIQB20 - Modulation Coder..................................................................... 1.15 Option SMIQB21 - Bit Error Rate Test ................................................................... 1.16 Other Software Options.......................................................................................... 1.17 Option SMIQB19 - Rear Panel Connections for RF and LF................................... 1.18 Mounting into a 19" Rack ................................................................................................... 1.18 1125.5610.12 3 E-9 Contents SMIQ 2 Operation ............................................................................................................. 2.1 2.1 Front and Rear Panel ............................................................................................................ 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2 Display...................................................................................................................... 2.1 Controls and Inputs/Outputs of the Front Panel....................................................... 2.3 Elements of the Rear Panel ................................................................................... 2.13 Basic Operating Steps ........................................................................................................ 2.22 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.12 Design of the Display ............................................................................................. 2.22 Calling the Menus................................................................................................... 2.23 Selection and Change of Parameters .................................................................... 2.24 Triggering Action .................................................................................................... 2.25 Quick Selection of Menu (QUICK SELECT) .......................................................... 2.25 Use of [FREQ] and [LEVEL] Keys.......................................................................... 2.26 Use of [RF ON/OFF] and [MOD ON/OFF] Keys .................................................... 2.26 [ENTER] Key – Special Toggle Function ............................................................... 2.26 Changing Unit of Level ........................................................................................... 2.26 Correction of Input.................................................................................................. 2.27 Sample Setting for First Users ............................................................................... 2.27 List Editor ............................................................................................................... 2.32 2.2.12.1 Select and Generate - SELECT LIST ..................................................... 2.33 2.2.1.2 Deletion of Lists - DELETE LIST ............................................................ 2.34 2.2.11.3 Edition of Lists......................................................................................... 2.35 2.2.11.4 Pattern Setting to Operate the List Editor ............................................... 2.39 Save/Recall - Storing/Calling of Instrument Settings ........................................... 2.43 2.3 Menu Summary.................................................................................................................... 2.44 2.4 RF Frequency....................................................................................................................... 2.45 2.4.1 2.5 RF Level................................................................................................................................ 2.47 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.5.7 2.6 Level Offset ............................................................................................................ 2.49 Interrupt-free Level Setting..................................................................................... 2.50 Switching On/Off Internal Level Control ................................................................. 2.50 User Correction (UCOR) ........................................................................................ 2.52 EMF........................................................................................................................ 2.53 [RF ON / OFF]-Key................................................................................................. 2.54 Reset Overload Protection ..................................................................................... 2.54 Modulation - General........................................................................................................... 2.55 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.7 Frequency Offset.................................................................................................... 2.46 Modulation Sources................................................................................................ 2.55 LF Generator .......................................................................................................... 2.57 Simultaneous Modulation ....................................................................................... 2.57 [MOD ON/OFF] Key ............................................................................................... 2.58 Analog Modulations ............................................................................................................ 2.59 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 1125.5610.12 Amplitude Modulation............................................................................................. 2.59 Broadband AM (BB-AM)......................................................................................... 2.60 Frequency Modulation............................................................................................ 2.61 2.7.3.1 FM Deviation Limits ................................................................................ 2.62 4 E-9 SMIQ Contents 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.8 Vector Modulation ............................................................................................................... 2.66 2.8.1 2.9 2.7.3.2 Preemphasis ........................................................................................... 2.62 Phase Modulation................................................................................................... 2.63 2.7.4.1 PM Deviation Limits ................................................................................ 2.64 Pulse Modulation.................................................................................................... 2.65 I/Q Impairment ....................................................................................................... 2.69 Fading Simulation ............................................................................................................... 2.70 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.9.4 2.9.5 Output Power with Fading ...................................................................................... 2.71 Two-Channel Fading .............................................................................................. 2.71 Correlation between Paths ..................................................................................... 2.72 Menu FADING SIM ................................................................................................ 2.72 2.9.4.1 Menu STANDARD FADING ................................................................... 2.73 2.9.4.2 Menu FINE DELAY ................................................................................. 2.78 2.9.4.3 Menu MOVING DELAY........................................................................... 2.81 2.9.4.4 Menu BIRTH-DEATH.............................................................................. 2.83 Test procedure ....................................................................................................... 2.85 2.10 Digital Modulation ............................................................................................................... 2.86 2.10.1 2.10.2 2.10.3 2.10.4 2.10.5 2.10.6 2.10.7 2.10.8 2.10.9 Digital Modulation Methods and Coding................................................................. 2.87 2.10.1.1 PSK and QAM Modulation ...................................................................... 2.87 2.10.1.2 Modulation π/4DQPSK ............................................................................ 2.88 2.10.1.3 FSK Modulation ...................................................................................... 2.89 2.10.1.4 Coding..................................................................................................... 2.89 2.10.1.5 Setting Conflicts ...................................................................................... 2.91 Internal Modulation Data and Control Signals from Lists ....................................... 2.92 Internal PRBS Data and Pattern ............................................................................ 2.94 Digital Data and Clock output Signals .................................................................... 2.95 2.10.4.1 Serial Interfaces DATA, BIT CLOCK and SYMBOL CLOCK.................. 2.95 2.10.4.2 Parallel Interfaces DATA and SYMBOL CLOCK .................................... 2.95 External Modulation Data and Control Signals....................................................... 2.95 2.10.5.1 External Serial Modulation Data ............................................................. 2.96 2.10.5.2 External Parallel Modulation Data........................................................... 2.97 2.10.5.3 Asynchronous Interface for External Modulation Data ........................... 2.98 2.10.5.4 External Control Signals ......................................................................... 2.98 Envelope Control.................................................................................................... 2.99 Clock Signals........................................................................................................ 2.100 RF Level For Digital Modulation ........................................................................... 2.100 Digital Modulation Menu....................................................................................... 2.101 2.11 Digital Standard PHS......................................................................................................... 2.115 2.11.1 2.11.2 2.11.3 2.11.4 2.11.5 Sync and Trigger Signals ..................................................................................... 2.116 PN Generators as Internal Data Source .............................................................. 2.117 Lists as Internal Data Source ............................................................................... 2.118 External Modulation Data ..................................................................................... 2.118 Menu DIGITAL STANDARD - PHS...................................................................... 2.119 2.12 Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA............................................................................................ 2.130 2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 1125.5610.12 Sync and Trigger Signals ..................................................................................... 2.133 PRBS Data Source in Forward Link ..................................................................... 2.134 PN Generators as Internal Data Source for Reverse Link ................................... 2.135 5 E-9 Contents 2.12.4 2.12.5 2.12.6 SMIQ Menu IS-95 CDMA Standard - Forward Link Signal............................................. 2.136 Menu IS-95 CDMA Standard - Reverse Link Signal without Channel Coding .... 2.146 Menu IS-95 CDMA Standard - Reverse Link Signal with Channel Coding ......... 2.148 2.13 Digital Standard W-CDMA (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) ...................................................... 2.150 2.13.1 2.13.2 2.13.3 2.13.4 2.13.5 Sync and Trigger Signals ..................................................................................... 2.152 PN Generators as Internal Data Source .............................................................. 2.153 Lists as an Internal Data Source .......................................................................... 2.154 Menu W-CDMA Standard - Downlink and Uplink Signals without IQ Multiplex ... 2.154 Menu W-CDMA Standard - Uplink Signals with IQ Multiplex ............................... 2.165 2.14 Digital Standard 3GPP W-CDMA (FDD) ........................................................................... 2.169 2.14.1 2.14.2 2.14.3 1125.5610.12 Description of Mobile Radio Transmission Method 3GPP W-CDMA................... 2.169 2.14.1.1 System Components ............................................................................ 2.171 Generation of 3GPP W-CDMA Signals................................................................ 2.177 2.14.2.1 Menu WCDMA/3GPP ........................................................................... 2.179 2.14.2.2 WCDMA/3GPP Menu - Para. Predef. Submenu .................................. 2.189 2.14.2.3 WCDMA/3GPP Menu - Display of CCDF ............................................. 2.191 2.14.2.4 WCDMA/3GPP Menu – Displaying Constellation Diagrams ................ 2.192 2.14.2.5 WCDMA/3GPP Menu - BS Configuration Submenu ............................ 2.193 2.14.2.6 WCDMA/3GPP Menu - MS Configuration Submenu............................ 2.199 2.14.2.7 WCDMA/3GPP – Multi Channel Edit Menu .......................................... 2.208 2.14.2.8 WCDMA/3GPP – Display of Channel Graph Menu .............................. 2.210 2.14.2.9 WCDMA/3GPP Menu – Display of Code Domain and Code Domain Conflicts ................................................................................................ 2.211 2.14.2.10 Effect of CLIPPING LEVEL Parameter on Signal................................. 2.213 2.14.2.11 Synchronization and Trigger Signals .................................................... 2.215 2.14.2.12 Preset/Default Values ........................................................................... 2.216 Background Information for the Generation of 3GPP W-CDMA Signals ............. 2.219 2.14.3.1 3GPP W-CDMA Signals in Time Domain............................................. 2.219 2.14.3.2 3GPP W-CDMA Signals in the Frequency Range................................ 2.225 2.14.3.3 Effect of Data Source on the 3GPP W-CDMA Signal........................... 2.225 2.14.3.3.1 Two DPCHs with Uncorrelated Data ................................... 2.226 2.14.3.3.2 Two DPCHs with Same Data .............................................. 2.226 2.14.3.3.3 16 DPCHs with Uncorrelated Data...................................... 2.227 2.14.3.3.4 16 DPCHs with same Data.................................................. 2.228 2.14.3.3.5 Use of Timing Offset ........................................................... 2.229 2.14.3.4 Effects on Crest Factor ......................................................................... 2.230 2.14.3.5 Orthogonality of Channels .................................................................... 2.230 2.14.3.5.1 Ideal Scenario...................................................................... 2.230 2.14.3.5.2 Real Scenario ...................................................................... 2.230 2.14.3.5.3 Effect of SCH....................................................................... 2.231 2.14.3.5.4 Effect of S-CCPCH and the Other Downlink Channels ....... 2.231 2.14.3.5.5 Effect of PRACH and PCPCH ............................................. 2.231 2.14.3.5.6 Effect of Scrambling Code .................................................. 2.232 2.14.3.5.7 Effect of Symbol Rates and Channelization Code Numbers2.232 2.14.3.6 Simulation of Special Scenarios ........................................................... 2.234 2.14.3.6.1 Standard Base Station......................................................... 2.234 2.14.3.6.2 Base Station with More Than 128 DPCHs .......................... 2.234 2.14.3.6.3 Base Stations with Spreading Codes Used Several Times. 2.235 2.14.3.6.4 Several Base Stations ......................................................... 2.235 6 E-9 SMIQ Contents 2.15 Enhanced Functions For Digital Standard 3GPP W-CDMA (FDD) ....................................... 2.236 2.15.1 2.15.2 2.15.3 2.15.4 2.15.5 Test Setup ............................................................................................................ 2.236 Branching to Menus SMIQB48 of Digital Standard 3GPP WCDMA .................... 2.237 Enhanced Channels BS1/MS1............................................................................. 2.238 2.15.3.1 Downlink ............................................................................................... 2.240 2.15.3.1.1 P-CCPCH/BCH with System Frame Number...................... 2.241 2.15.3.1.2 Channel Coding................................................................... 2.243 2.15.3.1.3 Bit Error Insertion ................................................................ 2.244 2.15.3.1.4 External Power Control........................................................ 2.245 2.15.1.1.5 Further Setting of Enhanced Channels Menu ..................... 2.248 2.15.1.2 Uplink .................................................................................................... 2.253 2.15.1.3 Display of External Power Control Mode of Four Enhanced Channels 2.256 OCNS Channels................................................................................................... 2.257 2.15.4.1 OCNS Menu.......................................................................................... 2.257 2.15.1.2 Test of Maximum Input Level with SMIQ .............................................. 2.259 2.15.1.3 Favourable Sequence Length for OCNS Measurement ....................... 2.260 Additional MS Based On MS4.............................................................................. 2.260 2.16 Digital Standard NADC...................................................................................................... 2.262 2.16.1 2.16.2 2.16.3 2.16.4 2.16.5 Sync and Trigger Signals ..................................................................................... 2.263 PN Generators as Internal Data Source .............................................................. 2.264 Lists as Internal Data Source ............................................................................... 2.265 External Modulation Data ..................................................................................... 2.265 Menu DIGITAL STANDARD - NADC ................................................................... 2.266 2.17 Digital Standard PDC ........................................................................................................ 2.279 2.17.1 2.17.2 2.17.3 2.17.4 2.17.5 Sync and Trigger Signals ..................................................................................... 2.280 PN Generators as Internal Data Source .............................................................. 2.281 Lists as Internal Data Source ............................................................................... 2.282 External Modulation Data ..................................................................................... 2.282 Menu DIGITAL STANDARD - PDC...................................................................... 2.283 2.18 Digital Standard GSM/EDGE............................................................................................. 2.301 2.18.1 2.18.2 2.18.3 2.18.4 2.18.5 Sync and Trigger Signals ..................................................................................... 2.302 PN Generators as Internal Data Source .............................................................. 2.303 Lists as Internal Data Source ............................................................................... 2.304 External Modulation Data ..................................................................................... 2.304 Menu DIGITAL STANDARD - GSM/EDGE.......................................................... 2.305 2.19 Digital Standard DECT ...................................................................................................... 2.318 2.19.1 2.19.2 2.19.3 2.19.4 2.19.5 Sync and Trigger Signals ..................................................................................... 2.319 PN Generators as Internal Data Source .............................................................. 2.320 Lists as Internal Data Source ............................................................................... 2.321 External Modulation Data ..................................................................................... 2.321 Menu DIGITAL STANDARD - DECT ................................................................... 2.322 2.20 Digital Standard GPS ........................................................................................................ 2.334 2.20.1 2.20.2 2.20.3 1125.5610.12 Description of Global Positioning System (GPS) ................................................. 2.334 GPS Menu............................................................................................................ 2.335 Instructions for Generating GPS Signals ............................................................. 2.339 7 E-9 Contents SMIQ 2.21 Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB ................................................................................ 2.341 2.21.1 2.21.2 Function................................................................................................................ 2.341 2.19.1.1 Use of WinIQSIM .................................................................................. 2.344 ARB MOD Menu................................................................................................... 2.345 2.21.2.1 ARB MOD - TRIGGER Menu ............................................................... 2.347 2.21.2.2 ARB MOD - SELECT WAVEFORM Menu ........................................... 2.349 2.21.2.3 ARB MOD - DELETE WAVEFORM Menu ........................................... 2.352 2.21.2.4 ARB MOD - SET SMIQ ACCORDING TO WAVEFORM Menu .......... 2.352 2.21.2.5 ARB MOD - CLOCK... Menu................................................................ 2.354 2.21.2.6 ARB MOD - IQ OUTPUT... Menu ......................................................... 2.355 2.22 External Modulation Source AMIQ................................................................................... 2.356 2.23 Bit Error Rate Test ............................................................................................................. 2.368 2.23.1 2.23.2 Bit Error Rate Measurement with PN Sequences (BER) ..................................... 2.369 2.23.1.1 Operating Menu .................................................................................... 2.369 2.23.1.2 Signal Path and Waveform ................................................................... 2.373 2.23.1.3 Test Method .......................................................................................... 2.374 PRBS Polynomials ................................................................................ 2.375 Measurement Result, Accuracy, Measurement Time........................... 2.376 Possible Problems with BER Measurement and Related Solutions ..... 2.377 Block Error Rate Measurement (BLER) ............................................................... 2.378 2.23.2.1 Operating Menu .................................................................................... 2.378 2.23.2.2 CRC Polynomial.................................................................................... 2.380 2.23.2.3 Measurement Result, Accuracy, Measurement Time........................... 2.380 2.23.2.4 Possible BLER Measurement Problems and Solutions........................ 2.382 2.24 Noise Generator and Distortion Simulator...................................................................... 2.383 2.24.1 2.24.2 2.24.3 2.24.4 Setting NOISE/DIST Menu................................................................................... 2.384 Loading New Distortion Characteristics ............................................................... 2.387 Level Correction of the Distortion Simulator......................................................... 2.388 Calculation of the Distortion Characteristic from Polynomial Equations .............. 2.390 2.25 LF Output ........................................................................................................................... 2.391 2.26 Sweep ................................................................................................................................. 2.392 2.26.1 2.26.2 2.26.3 2.26.4 2.26.5 2.26.6 2.26.7 2.26.8 Setting the Sweep Range (START, STOP, CENTER and SPAN)....................... 2.392 Selecting the Sweep Run (SPACING LIN, LOG) ................................................. 2.393 Operating Modes (MODE) ................................................................................... 2.393 Trigger Input ......................................................................................................... 2.394 Sweep Outputs..................................................................................................... 2.394 RF Sweep............................................................................................................. 2.396 LEVEL Sweep ...................................................................................................... 2.398 LF Sweep ............................................................................................................. 2.399 2.27 LIST Mode .......................................................................................................................... 2.401 2.27.1 2.27.2 Operating Modes (MODE) ................................................................................... 2.401 Inputs/Outputs ...................................................................................................... 2.402 2.28 Memory Sequence............................................................................................................. 2.406 1125.5610.12 8 E-9 SMIQ Contents 2.29 Utilities................................................................................................................................ 2.410 2.29.1 2.29.2 2.29.3 2.29.4 2.29.5 2.29.6 2.29.7 2.29.8 2.29.9 2.29.10 2.29.11 2.29.12 2.29.13 2.29.14 2.29.15 2.29.16 2.29.17 2.29.18 IEC-Bus Address (SYSTEM-GPIB)..................................................................... 2.410 Parameter of the RS232 Interface (SYSTEM-RS232) ......................................... 2.411 Parameter of the SER DATA Input (SYSTEM-SERDATA) .................................. 2.412 Suppressing Indications and Deleting Memories (SYSTEM-SECURITY) ........... 2.413 Indication of the IEC-Bus Language (LANGUAGE) ............................................. 2.414 Reference Frequency Internal/External (REF OSC) ............................................ 2.414 Phase of the Output Signal (PHASE)................................................................... 2.415 Password Input With Functions Protected (PROTECT) ...................................... 2.416 Calibration (CALIB) .............................................................................................. 2.417 Indications of Module Variants (DIAG-CONFIG).................................................. 2.424 Voltage Indication of Test Points (DIAG-TPOINT) ............................................... 2.425 Measurement of CARRIER/NOISE RATIO (DIAG-C/N MEAS)........................... 2.426 Indications of Service Data (DIAG-PARAM) ........................................................ 2.427 Test (TEST).......................................................................................................... 2.427 Assigning Modulations to the [MOD ON/OFF] Key (MOD-KEY) .......................... 2.428 Setting Auxiliary Inputs/Outputs (AUX-I/O) .......................................................... 2.429 Switching On/Off Beeper (BEEPER).................................................................... 2.430 Installation of Software Option ............................................................................. 2.431 2.30 The Help System................................................................................................................ 2.432 2.31 Status.................................................................................................................................. 2.432 2.32 Error Messages.................................................................................................................. 2.433 1125.5610.12 9 E-9 Contents SMIQ 3 Remote Control.................................................................................................... 3.1 3.1 Brief Instructions................................................................................................................... 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 Switchover to Remote Control............................................................................................. 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.3 Interface Message ...................................................................................................... 3.4 Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) ........................................... 3.5 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages................................................................... 3.5 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.5 Remote Control via IEC Bus ....................................................................................... 3.3 3.2.1.1 Setting the Device Address....................................................................... 3.3 3.2.1.2 Indications during Remote Control ........................................................... 3.3 3.2.1.3 Return to Manual Operation...................................................................... 3.3 Remote Control via RS-232-Interface......................................................................... 3.4 3.2.2.1 Setting the Transmission Parameters ...................................................... 3.4 3.2.2.2 Indications during Remote Control ........................................................... 3.4 3.2.2.3 Return to Manual Operating...................................................................... 3.4 Messages ............................................................................................................................... 3.4 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4 IEC-Bus....................................................................................................................... 3.1 RS-232 Interface......................................................................................................... 3.2 SCPI Introduction........................................................................................................ 3.5 Structure of a Command ............................................................................................ 3.6 Structure of a Command Line..................................................................................... 3.8 Responses to Queries ................................................................................................ 3.8 Parameter ................................................................................................................... 3.9 Overview of Syntax Elements ................................................................................... 3.11 Description of Commands.................................................................................................. 3.12 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 3.5.10 3.5.11 3.5.12 3.5.13 3.5.14 1125.5610.12 Notation..................................................................................................................... 3.12 Common Commands................................................................................................ 3.14 ABORt System.......................................................................................................... 3.17 ARB System.............................................................................................................. 3.18 3.5.4.1 ARB Waveform Format .......................................................................... 3.23 3.5.4.2 Creating a Waveform „Manually“ ............................................................ 3.25 3.5.4.3 Converting a Waveform with the Application Software AMIQ-K2 ........... 3.29 3.5.4.4 AMIQ Compatible Commands for Transmission and Administration of Waveforms ............................................................................................. 3.29 BERT System ........................................................................................................... 3.30 BLER System............................................................................................................ 3.34 CALibration System .................................................................................................. 3.37 DIAGnostic System................................................................................................... 3.40 DISPLAY System ...................................................................................................... 3.43 FORMat System ....................................................................................................... 3.44 MEMory System........................................................................................................ 3.45 OUTPut System ........................................................................................................ 3.46 OUTPut2 System ...................................................................................................... 3.48 SOURce System....................................................................................................... 3.49 3.5.14.1 SOURce:AM Subsystem......................................................................... 3.50 3.5.14.2 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem.......................................................... 3.51 3.5.14.3 SOURce:DECT Subsystem .................................................................... 3.53 10 E-9 SMIQ Contents 3.5.15 3.5.16 3.5.17 3.5.18 3.5.19 3.5.20 3.6 Instrument Model and Command Processing ................................................................ 3.215 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.6.6 3.7 3.5.14.4 SOURce:DIST Subsystem...................................................................... 3.61 3.5.14.5 SOURce:DM Subsystem ........................................................................ 3.65 Vector Modulation ................................................................................... 3.65 Digital Modulation ................................................................................... 3.67 3.5.14.6 SOURce:FM Subsystem......................................................................... 3.78 3.5.14.7 SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem .......................................................... 3.80 3.5.14.8 SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem ..................................................................... 3.82 3.5.14.9 SOURce:GPS Subsystem ...................................................................... 3.93 3.5.14.10 SOURce:GSM Subsystem (Digital Standard GSM/EDGE) .................... 3.96 3.5.14.11 SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) .................. 3.102 3.5.14.12 SOURce:LIST Subsystem .................................................................... 3.110 3.5.14.13 SOURce:MARKer Subsystem .............................................................. 3.112 3.5.14.14 SOURce:MODulation Subsystem ......................................................... 3.114 3.5.14.15 SOURce:NADC Subsystem.................................................................. 3.115 3.5.14.16 SOURce:NOISe Subsystem ................................................................. 3.123 3.5.14.17 SOURce:PDC Subsystem .................................................................... 3.124 3.5.14.18 SOURce:PHASe Subsystem ................................................................ 3.133 3.5.14.19 SOURce:PHS Subsystem..................................................................... 3.134 3.5.14.20 SOURce:PM Subsystem....................................................................... 3.142 3.5.14.21 SOURce:POWer Subsystem ................................................................ 3.144 3.5.14.22 SOURce:PULM Subsystem .................................................................. 3.147 3.5.14.23 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem ......................................................... 3.148 3.5.14.24 SOURce:SWEep Subsystem................................................................ 3.149 3.5.14.25 SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) ..................... 3.152 3.5.14.26 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem ............................................................... 3.159 3.5.14.27 SOURce:W3GPp:ENHanced/OCNS/ADDitional Subsystems ............. 3.180 SOURce2 System................................................................................................... 3.194 3.5.15.1 SOURce2:FREQuency Subsystem ...................................................... 3.194 3.5.15.2 SOURce2:MARKer Subsystem ............................................................ 3.196 3.5.15.3 SOURce2:SWEep Subsystem.............................................................. 3.197 STATus System ...................................................................................................... 3.199 SYSTem System .................................................................................................... 3.201 TEST System.......................................................................................................... 3.207 TRIGger System ..................................................................................................... 3.210 UNIT System .......................................................................................................... 3.215 Input Unit................................................................................................................. 3.215 Command Recognition ........................................................................................... 3.216 Data Set and Instrument Hardware ........................................................................ 3.216 Status Reporting System ........................................................................................ 3.216 Output Unit.............................................................................................................. 3.217 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization........................................... 3.217 Status Reporting System.................................................................................................. 3.218 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 1125.5610.12 Structure of an SCPI Status Register ..................................................................... 3.218 Overview of the Status Registers ........................................................................... 3.220 Description of the Status Registers ........................................................................ 3.221 3.7.3.1 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) ......... 3.221 3.7.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) ................................ 3.222 3.7.3.3 Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)3.222 3.7.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register ............................................................... 3.223 3.7.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable Register........................................................... 3.224 11 E-9 Contents 3.7.4 3.7.5 3.8 SMIQ Application of the Status Reporting Systems.......................................................... 3.225 3.7.4.1 Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure .................... 3.225 3.7.4.2 Serial Poll.............................................................................................. 3.225 3.7.4.3 Parallel Poll ........................................................................................... 3.226 3.7.4.4 Query by Means of Commands ............................................................ 3.226 3.7.4.5 Error Queue Query ............................................................................... 3.226 Resetting Values of the Status Reporting Systems ................................................ 3.227 Fast Restore Mode ............................................................................................................ 3.228 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 Commands ............................................................................................................. 3.228 Call-Up and Termination of Operating Mode .......................................................... 3.229 Effects on Device Settings...................................................................................... 3.229 Alternative Use with Other IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands ........................................... 3.230 Synchronization Signal............................................................................................ 3.230 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting .................................................................... 4.2 4.1 Maintenance........................................................................................................................... 4.2 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 Cleaning the Outside................................................................................................ 4.2 Storage..................................................................................................................... 4.2 Functional Test ...................................................................................................................... 4.2 1125.5610.12 12 E-9 SMIQ Contents 5 Checking the Rated Characteristics .................................................................. 5.2 5.1 Test Equipment and Test Assemblies................................................................................. 5.2 5.1.1 5.1.2 Measuring Equipment and Accessories................................................................... 5.2 Test Assemblies....................................................................................................... 5.3 5.1.2.1 Standard Test Assembly for Analog Modulations ..................................... 5.3 5.1.2.2 Test Assembly for Analog Modulations with Audio Analyzer .................... 5.5 5.1.2.3 Test Assembly for Broadband FM ............................................................ 5.5 5.1.2.4 Test Assembly for Pulse Modulation ........................................................ 5.6 5.1.2.5 Test Assembly for Vector Modulation ....................................................... 5.6 5.1.2.6 Test Assembly for SSB Phase Noise ....................................................... 5.7 5.1.2.7 Test Assembly for Output Impedance (VSWR) ........................................ 5.7 5.1.2.8 Test Assembly with Spectrum Analyzer for Fading Simulation................. 5.8 5.1.2.9 Test Assembly with Sampling Oscilloscope for Fading Simulation .......... 5.8 5.1.2.10 Test Assembly for Amplitude Settling ....................................................... 5.8 5.2 Preparation, Recommended Test Frequencies and Levels .............................................. 5.9 5.3 Test Procedures .................................................................................................................. 5.10 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 1125.5610.12 Display and Keyboard ............................................................................................ 5.10 Frequency .............................................................................................................. 5.10 5.3.2.1 Frequency Setting................................................................................... 5.10 5.3.1.2 Settling Time ........................................................................................... 5.12 5.3.1.3 Setting Time LIST MODE ....................................................................... 5.14 Reference Frequency............................................................................................. 5.15 5.3.1.1 Output of Internal Reference .................................................................. 5.15 5.3.1.2 Input for External Reference................................................................... 5.15 Level....................................................................................................................... 5.15 5.3.4.1 Level Uncertainty .................................................................................... 5.15 5.31.1.2 Output Impedance .................................................................................. 5.17 5.3.1.3 Settling Time ........................................................................................... 5.18 5.31.1.4 Non-Interrupting Level Setting (ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED)............. 5.20 5.3.1.5 Overvoltage Protection (if provided) ....................................................... 5.21 Spectral Purity ........................................................................................................ 5.21 5.3.5.1 Harmonics............................................................................................... 5.21 5.3.1.2 Subharmonics ......................................................................................... 5.22 5.3.1.3 Nonharmonics......................................................................................... 5.22 5.3.1.4 Broadband Noise .................................................................................... 5.25 5.3.1.5 SSB Phase Noise ................................................................................... 5.26 5.3.1.6 Residual FM............................................................................................ 5.27 5.3.1.7 Residual AM............................................................................................ 5.27 Sweep .................................................................................................................... 5.27 Internal Modulation Generator................................................................................ 5.28 Vector Modulation .................................................................................................. 5.29 5.3.8.1 Input Impedance (VSWR)....................................................................... 5.29 5.3.1.2 Maximum Level....................................................................................... 5.29 5.3.1.3 Error Vector............................................................................................. 5.30 5.3.1.4 Modulation Frequency Response ........................................................... 5.30 5.3.1.5 Residual Carrier and Leakage ................................................................ 5.31 5.3.1.6 I/Q Imbalance ......................................................................................... 5.32 5.3.1.7 Level Control POW RAMP...................................................................... 5.33 Amplitude Modulation............................................................................................. 5.35 5.3.9.1 Modulation Depth Setting........................................................................ 5.35 13 E-9 Contents 5.3.10 5.3.11 5.3.12 5.3.13 5.3.14 5.3.15 5.3.16 5.3.17 5.3.18 5.3.19 5.3.20 1125.5610.12 SMIQ 5.3.9.2 AM Distortion .......................................................................................... 5.35 5.3.9.3 AM Frequency Response ....................................................................... 5.35 5.3.9.4 Residual PhiM with AM ........................................................................... 5.36 5.3.9.5 Level Monitoring at Input EXT1............................................................... 5.36 Broadband Amplitude Modulation .......................................................................... 5.37 Pulse Modulation.................................................................................................... 5.37 5.3.11.1 ON/OFF Ratio ......................................................................................... 5.37 5.3.11.2 Dynamic Characteristics ......................................................................... 5.38 Frequency Modulation (Option SM-B5).................................................................. 5.38 5.3.12.1 FM Deviation Setting............................................................................... 5.38 5.3.12.2 FM Distortion........................................................................................... 5.39 5.3.12.3 FM Frequency Response........................................................................ 5.40 5.3.12.4 FM Preemphasis (optional)..................................................................... 5.41 5.3.12.5 Residual AM with FM .............................................................................. 5.41 5.3.12.6 Carrier Frequency Error with FM ............................................................ 5.41 5.3.12.7 Level Monitoring at Input EXT2............................................................... 5.42 Phase Modulation (Option SM-B5)......................................................................... 5.42 5.3.13.1 Deviation Setting..................................................................................... 5.42 5.3.13.2 PhiM Distortion........................................................................................ 5.42 5.3.13.3 PhiM Frequency Response..................................................................... 5.43 Digital Modulation (Option SMIQB20) .................................................................... 5.43 5.3.14.1 Level Error and Residual Carrier with Digital Modulation ....................... 5.43 5.3.14.2 Analog Outputs with Digital Modulation .................................................. 5.44 5.3.14.3 Modulation Depth with ASK .................................................................... 5.44 5.3.14.4 Deviation Error with FSK......................................................................... 5.44 5.3.14.5 Deviation Error with GFSK...................................................................... 5.45 5.3.14.6 Phase Error with GMSK.......................................................................... 5.45 5.3.14.7 Error Vector with PSK ............................................................................. 5.45 5.3.14.8 Error Vector with QAM ............................................................................ 5.45 Data Generator and Memory Extension (Option SMIQB11/SMIQB12) ................. 5.46 5.3.15.1 Battery Test............................................................................................. 5.46 5.3.15.2 Function Test .......................................................................................... 5.46 5.3.15.3 Interface SERDATA................................................................................ 5.48 5.3.15.4 Memory Test (including SMIQB12)......................................................... 5.49 Digital Standards (Options) .................................................................................... 5.51 5.3.16.1 Adjacent-Channel Power Measurement with Higher Resolution ............ 5.51 5.1.16.1.1 Broadband Systems .............................................................. 5.51 5.1.16.1.2 Narrowband Systems ............................................................ 5.52 5.3.16.2 GSM/EDGE............................................................................................. 5.52 5.3.16.3 DECT ...................................................................................................... 5.53 5.3.16.4 NADC...................................................................................................... 5.55 5.3.16.5 TETRA .................................................................................................... 5.55 5.3.16.6 PDC ........................................................................................................ 5.56 5.3.16.7 PHS......................................................................................................... 5.57 IS-95 CDMA (Option SMIQB42)............................................................................. 5.58 W-CDMA - NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0 (Option SMIQB43) ........................................ 5.59 3GPP W-CDMA for SMIQ with firmware version up to 5.20 (Options SMIQB20 and SMIQB45) ........................................................................ 5.60 5.1.19.1 3GPP W-CDMA with 1 Code Channel.................................................... 5.60 5.1.19.2 3GPP W-CDMA with 8 Code Channels.................................................. 5.62 3GPP W-CDMA for SMIQ with Firmware Versions 5.30 or Higher (Options SMIQB20 and SMIQB45) ........................................................................ 5.64 5.3.20.1 3GPP W-CDMA with 1 Code Channel.................................................... 5.64 14 E-9 SMIQ Contents 5.3.21 5.3.22 5.3.23 5.3.24 5.3.25 5.3.26 5.4 5.3.20.2 3GPP W-CDMA with 8 Code Channels.................................................. 5.67 5.3.20.3 3GPP W-CDMA Test Model 1, 64 DPCH............................................... 5.68 3GPP W-CDMA Enhanced Channels (SMIQB48) ................................................. 5.69 5.3.21.1 External Power Control ........................................................................... 5.69 Bit Error Rate Test (Option SMIQB21)................................................................... 5.70 Fading Simulation (Option SMIQB14/SMIQB15) ................................................... 5.72 5.3.23.1 Frequency Response.............................................................................. 5.72 53.23.2 Additional Modulation Frequency Response .......................................... 5.73 5.3.23.3 Carrier Leakage for Fading..................................................................... 5.73 5.3.23.4 Path Attenuation ..................................................................................... 5.73 5.3.23.5 Path Delay (optional)............................................................................... 5.76 5.3.23.6 Doppler Shift (optional) ........................................................................... 5.77 Noise Generation and Distortion Simulation (Option SMIQB17)............................ 5.78 5.3.24.1 RF Bandwidth ......................................................................................... 5.78 5.3.24.2 Additional Modulation Frequency Response .......................................... 5.80 5.3.24.3 Residual Carrier ...................................................................................... 5.80 5.3.24.4 Frequency Response through to I-FADED, Q-FADED Outputs ............. 5.81 5.3.24.5 Signal/Noise Ratio (Carrier/Noise Ratio) ................................................ 5.82 5.3.24.6 Signal/Noise Ratio (Carrier/Noise Ratio) Worldspace ............................ 5.84 5.3.24.7 Error Vector............................................................................................. 5.84 5.3.24.8 Noise Frequency Response.................................................................... 5.85 Arbitrary Waveform Generator (ARB, Option SMIQB60)....................................... 5.86 5.3.25.1 Frequency Response.............................................................................. 5.86 5.3.25.2 DC Voltage Offset................................................................................... 5.87 5.3.25.3 Spurious-Free Dynamic Range (SFDR) ................................................. 5.87 5.3.25.4 Level Difference of Channels.................................................................. 5.89 Additional Measurements for SMIQ03S................................................................. 5.90 Performance Test Report.................................................................................................... 5.92 A Annex A ................................................................................................................A.2 A.1 IEC/IEEE Bus Interface..........................................................................................................A.2 A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.1.4 A.2 RS-232-C Interface.................................................................................................................A.5 A.2.1 A.2.2 A.2.3 A.3 Characteristics of the Interface ................................................................................A.2 Bus Lines..................................................................................................................A.2 Interface Functions...................................................................................................A.3 Interface Messages..................................................................................................A.4 Interface characteristics ...........................................................................................A.5 Signal lines ...............................................................................................................A.5 A.2.2.1 Transmission parameters .........................................................................A.6 Interface functions....................................................................................................A.6 A.2.3.1 Handshake................................................................................................A.7 Asynchronous Interface SERDATA .....................................................................................A.8 B Annex B ................................................................................................................B.2 B.1 List of Error Messages..........................................................................................................B.2 B.1.1 B.1.2 1125.5610.12 SCPI-Specific Error Messages.................................................................................B.2 SMIQ-Specific Error Messages................................................................................B.6 15 E-9 Contents SMIQ C Annex C ................................................................................................................C.1 C.1 List of Commands (with SCPI Conformity Information) ....................................................C.1 D Annex D ................................................................................................................D.1 D.1 Programming Examples .......................................................................................................D.1 1. 2. 2.1. 2.2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Including IEC-Bus Library for QuickBasic ................................................................D.1 Initialization and Default Status ................................................................................D.1 Initiate Controller ......................................................................................................D.1 Initiate Instrument.....................................................................................................D.1 Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands......................................................D.2 Switchover to Manual Control ..................................................................................D.2 Reading out Instrument Settings ..............................................................................D.2 List Management......................................................................................................D.3 Command synchronization.......................................................................................D.3 Service Request .......................................................................................................D.4 10 Index 1125.5610.12 16 E-9 SMIQ Contents Tables Table 2-1 Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Input sockets for the different types of modulation........................................................... 2.55 Status messages in the case of a deviation from the rated value at the external modulation inputs EXT1 and EXT2..................................................................................................... 2.56 Parameter setting ranges ................................................................................................. 2.69 Table 2-4 Phase shifts for π/4DQPSK without coding...................................................................... 2.87 Table 2-5 Table 2-6 Table 2-7 Table 2-8 Table 2-9 Table 2-10 Table 2-11 Table 2-12 Table 2-13 Table 2-14 Table 2-15 Table 2-16 Table 2-17 Table 2-18 Table 2-19 Table 2-20 Table 2-21 Table 2-22 Table 2-23 Table 2-24 Table 2-25 Table 2-26 Table 2-27 Table 2-28 Table 2-29 Table 2-30 Table 2-31 Table 2-32 Table 2-33 Table 2-35 Table 3-1 Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table A-1 Table A-2 Table A-3 Table A-4 Phase shifts for π/4DQPSK with coding NADC, PDC, PHS, TETRA or APCO25 ........... 2.87 Phase shifts for π/4DQPSK with coding TFTS................................................................. 2.87 Frequency deviations for FSK methods ........................................................................... 2.88 Possible combination of modulation method and coding ................................................. 2.88 Coding algorithms............................................................................................................. 2.89 Examples of settings conflicts 2.90 PRBS generators of modulation coder ............................................................................. 2.93 Logic function of signals BURST GATE and LEVEL ATT ................................................ 2.98 PRBS generators for PHS 2.116 CDMA: channel numbers and their frequencies........................................................... 2.131 Preferred CDMA-frequency channels according to J-STD-008 ..................................... 2.131 PN generators for IS-95 reverse link .............................................................................. 2.134 PN generators for W-CDMA 2.152 Parameters of W-CDMA system 2.169 Generator polynomials of uplink long scrambling code generators................................ 2.171 Generator polynomials of uplink short scrambling code generators .............................. 2.172 Mapping of the quaternary output sequence into the binary IQ level ............................. 2.172 Hierarchical structure of 3GPP W-CDMA frames .......................................................... 2.174 Structure of the DPDCH channel table depending on the overall symbol rate............... 2.206 Change of crest factor in the case of clipping ................................................................ 2.213 Default values for base station parameters.................................................................... 2.216 Default values for mobile station parameters ................................................................. 2.217 References to measurement channels .......................................................................... 2.241 OCNS channels 2.256 PRBS generators for NADC 2.261 PRBS generators for PDC 2.278 PRBS generators for GSM 2.300 PRBS generators for DECT 2.317 LIST mode; Example of a list 2.393 MEMORY SEQUENCE; Example of a list...................................................................... 2.398 Common Commands ....................................................................................................... 3.14 List of possible responses to *OPT? ................................................................................ 3.15 Synchronization with *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI ............................................................... 3.213 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte .................................................................... 3.217 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register ..................................................... 3.218 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register ........................................ 3.219 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register.................................... 3.220 Resetting instrument functions ....................................................................................... 3.223 Measuring equipment and accessories.............................................................................. 5.1 Range limits, main test frequencies with/without vector modulation .................................. 5.7 Interface function ................................................................................................................A.2 Universal Commands .........................................................................................................A.3 Addressed Commands.......................................................................................................A.3 Interface functions (RS-232-C)...........................................................................................A.5 1125.5610.12 17 E-9 Contents SMIQ Figures Fig. 1-1 Fig. 1-2 Fig. 1-3 Fig. 1-4 Fig. 2-1 Fig. 2-2 Fig. 2-3 Fig. 2-4 Fig. 2-5 Fig. 2-6 Fig. 2-7 Fig. 2-8 Fig. 2-9 Fig. 2-10 Fig. 2-11 Fig. 2-12 Fig. 2-13 Fig. 2-14 Fig. 2-15, a to c Fig. 2-16 Fig. 2-17 Fig. 2-18 Fig. 2-19 Fig. 2-20 Fig. 2-21 Fig. 2-22 Fig. 2-23 Fig. 2-24 Fig. 2-25 Fig. 2-26 Fig. 2-27 Fig. 2-28 Fig. 2-29 Fig. 2-30 Fig. 2-31 Fig. 2-32 Fig. 2-33 Fig. 2-34 Fig. 2-35 Fig. 2-36 Fig. 2-37 Fig. 2-38 Fig. 2-39 Fig. 2-40 Fig. 2-41 Fig. 2-42 Fig. 2-43 Fig. 2-44 Fig. 2-45 1125.5610.12 SMIQ, view from the top ..............................................................................................1.5 Module FSIM............................................................................................................... 1.9 Module NDSIM.......................................................................................................... 1.13 Module MCOD .......................................................................................................... 1.14 Front panel view.......................................................................................................... 2.2 Rear panel view ........................................................................................................ 2.12 Design of the display................................................................................................. 2.22 MODULATION-AM menu ......................................................................................... 2.23 Display after AM setting ............................................................................................ 2.29 Display after pattern setting ...................................................................................... 2.31 OPERATION page of the MEM SEQ menu.............................................................. 2.32 SELECT-LIST-selection window............................................................................... 2.33 DELETE-LIST selection window............................................................................... 2.34 Edit function EDIT/VIEW .......................................................................................... 2.35 Block function FILL: Input window ............................................................................ 2.36 Edit function INSERT: Input window ......................................................................... 2.38 Edit function DELETE: Input window ........................................................................ 2.39 Starting point of the pattern setting ........................................................................... 2.40 Pattern setting - Edition of a list ................................................................................ 2.42 Menu FREQUENCY (preset setting) ........................................................................ 2.45 Example of a circuit with frequency offset ................................................................ 2.46 Menu LEVEL (preset setting) POWER RESOLUTION is set to 0.01 dB.................. 2.47 Example of a circuit with level offset......................................................................... 2.49 Menu LEVEL - ALC (preset setting) ......................................................................... 2.51 Menu LEVEL - UCOR - OPERATION side............................................................... 2.52 Menu UCOR - LEVEL-EDIT side.............................................................................. 2.53 Menu LEVEL-EMF .................................................................................................... 2.53 Example: Status message "EXT1-LOW" in case of voltage at EXT1 too low .......... 2.56 Example: Settings of the LF generator in the AM menu ........................................... 2.57 Menu ANALOG MOD-AM (preset setting)................................................................ 2.59 Menu ANALOG MOD - BB-AM (preset setting)........................................................ 2.60 Menu ANALOG MOD-FM (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B5, FM/PM-modulator ..................................................................................................... 2.61 Dependency of the FM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set ........................ 2.62 Menu ANALOG MOD - PM (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B5, FM/PMmodulator .................................................................................................................. 2.63 Dependency of the PM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set ........................ 2.64 Menu MODULATION-PULSE (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B3, pulse modulator, and option SM-B4, pulse generator ........................................................ 2.65 Example: vector modulation ..................................................................................... 2.66 VECTOR MOD menu (preset settings), equipped with option SMIQB47 and IQMOD var. 8 or higher ............................................................................................ 2.67 Effect of I/Q impairment............................................................................................ 2.69 Fading simulator in the SMIQ ................................................................................... 2.70 Two-channel fading .................................................................................................. 2.71 Menu FADING SIM with submenus.......................................................................... 2.72 Menu STANDARD FADING (two Fading Simulators installed) ................................ 2.73 Doppler Frequency shift with moving receiver .......................................................... 2.76 Menu FINE DELAY ................................................................................................... 2.78 Two paths with menu MOVING DELAY ................................................................... 2.80 Menu MOVING DELAY............................................................................................. 2.80 Example of hop sequence with BIRTH-DEATH fading............................................. 2.82 Menu BIRTH-DEATH................................................................................................ 2.82 18 E-9 SMIQ Fig. 2-46 Fig. 2-47 Fig. 2-48 Fig. 2-49 Fig. 2-50 Fig. 2-51 Fig. 2-52 Fig. 2-53 Fig. 2-54 Fig. 2-55 Fig. 2-56 Fig. 2-57 Fig. 2-58 Fig. 2-59 Fig. 2-60 Fig. 2-61 Fig. 2-62 Fig. 2-63 Fig. 2-64 Fig. 2-65 Fig. 2-66 Fig. 2-67 Fig. 2-68 Fig. 2-69 Fig. 2-70 Fig. 2-71 Fig. 2-72 Fig. 2-73 Fig. 2-74 Fig. 2-75 Fig. 2-76 Fig. 2-77 Fig. 2-78 Fig. 2-79 Fig. 2-80 1125.5610.12 Contents Pulse on Oscilloscope .............................................................................................. 2.84 Modulation coder in SMIQ ........................................................................................ 2.85 Digital input signals of modulation coder .................................................................. 2.85 Functional blocks Coding and Mapping.................................................................... 2.86 Constellation diagrams of BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK and 16QAM ................................... 2.86 DATA LIST for modulation data................................................................................ 2.91 CONTROL LIST for control signals .......................................................................... 2.92 9-bit PRBS generator................................................................................................ 2.93 External serial data and bit clock Data change should take place only on the negative clock edge. ................................................................................................. 2.95 External serial data and symbol clock, 3 bit/symbol SYMBOL CLOCK = High marks the LSB. A status change of DATA and SYMBOL CLOCK should be performed synchronously.......................................................................................... 2.95 External serial data, internal clock signals................................................................ 2.95 External parallel data and symbol clock Data change should take place only on the negative clock edge. ........................................................................................... 2.96 External parallel data and symbol clock SYMBOL CLOCK = High marks the LSB. A status change of DATA and SYMBOL CLOCK should be performed synchronously......2.96 Envelope control in SMIQ with modulation coder ..................................................... 2.98 Signal waveforms during envelope control ............................................................... 2.99 DIGITAL MOD menu, SMIQ equipped with option Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and option Data Generator SMIQB11............................................................................ 2.100 DIGITAL MOD-SOURCE menu, SMIQ equipped with option Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and option Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.100 DIGITAL MOD - MODULATION... menu, SMIQ equipped with option Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and option Data Generator SMIQB11 ......................................... 2.103 DIGITAL MOD -FILTER... menu, SMIQ equipped with option Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and option Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.105 DIGITAL MOD - TRIGGER menu, SMIQ equipped with option Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and option Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.108 DIGITAL MOD - CLOCK, SMIQ equipped with option Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and option Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.109 DIGITAL MOD - POWER RAMP CONTROL menu, SMIQ equipped with option Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and option Data Generator SMIQB11....................... 2.111 DIGITAL MOD - EXT INPUTS menu, SMIQ equipped with option Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and option Data Generator SMIQB11 ......................................... 2.112 Menu DIGITAL STD - PHS, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ............................................................................... 2.118 Menu DIGITAL STD - PHS - MODULATION..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.118 Menu DIGITAL STD - PHS_TRIGGER..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11............................................................... 2.120 Menu DIGITAL STD - PHS - CLOCK..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11............................................................... 2.122 Menu DIGITAL STD - PHS - POWER RAMP CONTROL... , SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.123 Menu DIGITAL STD - PHS - SAVE/RCL FRAME, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.124 Menu DIGITAL STD - PHS - SELECT SLOT, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.125 Forward link signal generation ................................................................................ 2.129 Reverse link signal generation without channel coding .......................................... 2.130 Traffic channel 9600 in "Reverse Link Coded" mode ............................................. 2.130 Frame structure of traffic channel 9600 in "Reverse Link Coded" mode................ 2.131 CDMA sync signals................................................................................................. 2.132 19 E-9 Contents Fig. 2-81 Fig. 2-82 Fig. 2-83 Fig. 2-84 Fig. 2-85 Fig. 2-86 Fig. 2-87 Fig. 2-88 Fig. 2-89 Fig. 2-90 Fig. 2-91 Fig. 2-92 Fig. 2-93 Fig. 2-94 Fig. 2-95 Fig. 2-96 Fig. 2-98 Fig. 2-99 Fig. 2-100 Fig. 2-101 Fig. 2-102 Fig. 2-103 Fig. 2-104 Fig. 2-105 Fig. 2-106 Fig. 2-107 Fig. 2-108 Fig. 2-109 Fig. 2-110 Fig. 2-111 Fig. 2-112 Fig. 2-113 Fig. 2-114 Fig. 2-115 Fig. 2-116 Fig. 2-117 Fig. 2-118 Fig. 2-119 1125.5610.12 SMIQ Menu DIGITAL STD - IS-95 - MODE - FWD_LINK_18, equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB42 .................. 2.135 Menu DIGITAL STD - IS-95 - MODULATION..., equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB42 .................. 2.137 Menu DIGITAL STD - IS-95 - TRIGGER..., equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB42..................................... 2.139 Menu DIGITAL STD - IS-95 - CLOCK..., equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB42............................................... 2.141 Menu DIGITAL STD - IS-95 - SAVE/RCL MAPPING..., equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB42 .................. 2.143 Menu DIGITAL STD - IS-95 - MODE - REV_LINK ................................................. 2.145 Menu DIGITAL STD - IS-95 - MODE - REV_LINK_CODED .................................. 2.147 Downlink DPCH signal generation for a code channel ........................................... 2.149 Uplink signal generation with IQ multiplex and several code channels .................. 2.150 Menu DIGITAL STD - WCDMA - MODE - 8CHAN, LINK DIRECTION/MULTIPLEX DOWN, equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB43......................................................................................... 2.153 Menu DIGITAL STD - WCDMA - MODULATION..., equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB43 .................. 2.156 Menu DIGITAL STD - WCDMA - TRIGGER..., equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB43 .................. 2.158 Menu DIGITAL STD - WCDMA - MULTICODE..., equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB43 .................. 2.160 Menu DIGITAL STD - WCDMA - SPREAD CODE; equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB43 .................. 2.161 Menu DIGITAL STD - WCDMA - DATA; equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB43............................................... 2.162 Menu DIGITAL STD - WCDMA - MODE - 8CHAN, -LINK DIRECTION/MULTIPLEX UP_IQ_MULT, equipped with options modulation coder SMIQB20, data generator SMIQB11 and SMIQB43......................................................................................... 2.164 Structure of the downlink scrambling code generator ............................................ 2.171 Structure of the uplink short scrambling code generator ........................................ 2.172 Constellation diagram of a channel with 0 dB power .............................................. 2.173 Constellation diagram of a channel with –6 dB power ............................................ 2.175 Constellation diagram of a 3GPP W-CDMA signal with two DPCH channels ........ 2.176 Overview of DIGITAL STD – 3GPP WCDMA/3GPP menu structure ..................... 2.177 DIGITAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP - Downlink menu.................................................. 2.178 DIGITAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP - FILTER... menu................................................. 2.180 DIGITAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP - Downlink - COPY BS(MS) menu....................... 2.182 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – TRIGGER... menu ........................................... 2.183 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – SELECT BS(MS) menu ................................... 2.185 DIGITAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP - PARA. PREDEF. menu (only downlink) ............ 2.186 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – CCDF menu with a trace ................................. 2.187 Reading off the crest factor from LEVEL displays .................................................. 2.187 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – CCDF menu with three traces ......................... 2.187 DIGITAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP – CONSTELLATION menu ................................. 2.188 DIGITAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP - BS CONFIGURATION menu ............................ 2.189 Dynamic change of channel power (continuous).................................................... 2.191 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – BS CONFIGURATION / channel table menu .. 2.192 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – MS CONFIGURATION menu .......................... 2.194 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – MS CONFIGURATION: PRACH only Mode menu....................................................................................................................... 2.197 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – MS CONFIGURATION: PCPCH only Mode menu....................................................................................................................... 2.198 20 E-9 SMIQ Fig. 2-120 Fig. 2-121 Fig. 2-122 Fig. 2-123 Fig. 2-124 Fig. 2-125 Fig. 2-126 Fig. 2-127 Fig. 2-128 Fig. 2-129 Fig. 2-130 Fig. 2-131 Fig. 2-132 Fig. 2-133 Fig. 2-134 Fig. 2-135 Fig. 2-136 Fig. 2-137 Fig. 2-138 Fig. 2-139 Fig. 2-140 Fig. 2-141 Fig. 2-142 Fig. 2-143 Fig. 2-144 Fig. 2-145 Fig. 2-146 Fig. 2-147 Fig. 2-148 Fig. 2-149 Fig. 2-150 Fig. 2-151 Fig. 2-152 Fig. 2-153 Fig. 2-154 Fig. 2-155 Fig. 2-156 Fig. 2-157 Fig. 2-158 Fig. 2-159 Fig. 2-160 Fig. 2-161 Fig. 2-162 Fig. 2-163 Fig. 2-164 Fig. 2-165 Fig. 2-166 Fig. 2-167 1125.5610.12 Contents DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – MS CONFIGURATION: DPCCH + DPDCH Mode menu............................................................................................................. 2.200 Dynamic change of channel power (continuous).................................................... 2.201 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – BS CONFIGURATION / MULTI CHANNEL EDIT menu.............................................................................................................. 2.203 DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – BS CONFIGURATION /CHANNEL GRAPH menu ......................................................................................................... 2.205 Code tree of channelization codes.......................................................................... 2.206 WCDMA/3GPP – BS CONFIGURATION / CODE DOMAIN menu (without conflict)2.206 WCDMA/3GPP – BS CONFIGURATION / CODE DOMAIN menu (with conflict) .. 2.207 WCDMA/3GPP – BS CONFIGURATION / CODE DOMAIN CONFLICT menu..... 2.207 WCDMA/3GPP – BS CONFIGURATION / CODE DOMAIN menu (after conflict resolution) ............................................................................................................... 2.208 Constellation at clipping level 100% (not clipped)................................................... 2.209 Constellation at clipping level 50% ......................................................................... 2.209 Signal consisting of P-CCPCH, P-SCH and S-SCH in time domain....................... 2.214 Signal consisting of P-CCPCH, P-SCH and S-SCH in time domain (zoomed) ...... 2.214 Constellation diagram of a signal consisting of P-CCPCH, P-SCH and S-SCH..... 2.215 Envelope of P-CCPCH............................................................................................ 2.215 Envelope of P-SCH or S-SCH ................................................................................ 2.216 Envelope of AICH (Subchannel) ............................................................................. 2.216 Envelope of AICH (four subchannels) .................................................................... 2.216 Envelope of DL-DPCCH ......................................................................................... 2.216 Envelope of DPCH 60 ksps without TFCI............................................................... 2.216 Constellation of a DPDCH/DPCCH channel........................................................... 2.217 Constellation of an uplink signal consisting of a DPDCH and a DPCCH................ 2.217 Constellation of a PRACH....................................................................................... 2.218 Envelope of a PRACH ............................................................................................ 2.218 Envelope of a PCPCH ............................................................................................ 2.218 Magnitude spectrum of a 3GPP W-CDMA signal................................................... 2.219 Magnitude spectrum (section) of a 3GPP W-CDMA signal with several channels 2.219 Constellation of a signal with two DPCHs (uncorrelated data) ............................... 2.220 Signal with two DPCHs (same data) in time domain .............................................. 2.220 Constellation of a signal with two DPCHs (uncorrelated data) ............................... 2.221 Constellation with 16 uncorrelated channels (16 time slots)................................... 2.221 Constellation with 16 uncorrelated channels (1 time slot) ...................................... 2.222 Constellation diagram of 16 DPCHs with same data.............................................. 2.222 Constellation diagram of 16 DPCHs with timing offset ........................................... 2.223 CDPA of a signal with compensated SCH.............................................................. 2.225 Effect of SCH on CDP analysis (without compensation) ........................................ 2.225 Effect of different scrambling codes on the power distribution ............................... 2.226 Cancellation possible in case of several channels with identical spreading sequences .............................................................................................................. 2.226 Incorrect detection at various symbol rates ............................................................ 2.227 Non-restorable DPCH channel ............................................................................... 2.227 Complete setup for testing a W-CDMA receiver with SMIQ ................................... 2.230 Menu DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – Section Assistant/Enhanced Functions (downlink)................................................................................................................ 2.231 Menu DIGITAL STD – WCDMA/3GPP – Section Assistant/Enhanced Functions (uplink) .................................................................................................................... 2.231 Menu DIGITAL STD-WCDMA/3GPP-ENHANCED CHANNEL (downlink) ............ 2.233 Setup for testing Closed Loop Power Control......................................................... 2.236 Change of channel power of 4 enhanced channels................................................ 2.237 DIGTAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP - ENHANCED CHANNELS STATE (uplink) menu......2.243 Display of external power control mode.................................................................. 2.245 21 E-9 Contents Fig. 2-168 Fig. 2-169 Fig. 2-170 Fig. 2-171 Fig. 2-172 Fig. 2-173 Fig. 2-174 Fig. 2-175 Fig. 2-176 Fig. 2-177 Fig. 2-178 Fig. 2-179 Fig. 2-180 Fig. 2-181 Fig. 2-182 Fig. 2-183 Fig. 2-184 Fig. 2-185 Fig. 2-186 Fig. 2-187 Fig. 2-188 Fig. 2-189 Fig. 2-190 Fig. 2-191 Fig. 2-192 Fig. 2-193 Fig. 2-194 Fig. 2-195 Fig. 2-196 1125.5610.12 SMIQ DIGITAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP - OCNS CHANNELS menu ................................. 2.246 DIGITAL STD - WCDMA/3GPP ADDITIONAL MS STATE menu.......................... 2.249 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ............................................................................... 2.255 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC - MODULATION..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.255 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC_TRIGGER..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.257 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC - CLOCK..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.258 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC - POWER RAMP CONTROL... , SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......................... 2.259 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC - SAVE/RCL FRAME, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.261 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC - SELECT SLOT, LINK DIRECTION = DOWNLINK, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 2.262 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC - SELECT SLOT, LINK DIRECTION = UPLINK, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 2.265 Menu DIGITAL STD - NADC - SELECT SLOT, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.266 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ............................................................................... 2.272 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC - MODULATION..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.272 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC_TRIGGER..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11............................................................... 2.274 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC - CLOCK..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11............................................................... 2.275 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC - POWER RAMP CONTROL... , SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......................... 2.276 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC - SAVE/RCL FRAME, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.278 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC - SELECT SLOT, LINK DIRECTION DOWNLINK, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 2.279 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC - SELECT SLOT, LINK DIRECTION = DOWNLINK, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 2.283 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC - SELECT SLOT, LINK DIRECTION = DOWNLINK, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 2.285 Menu DIGITAL STD - PDC - SELECT SLOT, LINK DIRECTION = UPLINK, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......... 2.287 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11............................................................... 2.294 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE - MODULATION..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.294 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE_TRIGGER..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.296 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE - CLOCK..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.297 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE - POWER RAMP CONTROL... , SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......... 2.298 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE - SAVE/RCL FRAME, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.299 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE - SELECT SLOT - NORM, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......................... 2.300 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE - SELECT SLOT - DUMMY, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......... 2.302 22 E-9 SMIQ Fig. 2-197 Fig. 2-198 Fig. 2-199 Fig. 2-200 Fig. 2-201 Fig. 2-202 Fig. 2-203 Fig. 2-204 Fig. 2-205 Fig. 2-206 Fig. 2-207 Fig. 2-208 Fig. 2-209 Fig. 2-210 Fig. 2-211 Fig. 2-212 Fig. 2-213 Fig. 2-214 Fig. 2-215 Fig. 2-216 Fig. 2-217 Fig. 2-218 Fig. 2-219 Fig. 2-220 Fig. 2-221 Fig. 2-222 Fig. 2-223 Fig. 2-224 Fig. 2-225 Fig. 2-226 Fig. 2-227 Fig. 2-228 Fig. 2-229 Fig. 2-230 Fig. 2-231 Fig. 2-232 Fig. 2-233 Fig. 2-234 Fig. 2-235 Fig. 2-236 Fig. 2-237 Fig. 2-238 Fig. 2-239 Fig. 2-240 Fig. 2-241 Fig. 2-242 Fig. 2-243 1125.5610.12 Contents Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE - SELECT SLOT – ALL_DATA, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......... 2.304 Menu DIGITAL STD - GSM/EDGE - SELECT SLOT – EDGE, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......................... 2.305 Menu DIGITAL STD - DECT, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ............................................................................... 2.311 Menu DIGITAL STD - DECT - MODULATION... .................................................... 2.311 Menu DIGITAL STD - DECT_TRIGGER..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.313 Menu DIGITAL STD - DECT - CLOCK..., SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11............................................................... 2.315 Menu DIGITAL STD - DECT - POWER RAMP CONTROL... , SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .......................... 2.316 Menu DIGITAL STD - DECT - SAVE/RCL FRAME, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 ................................. 2.317 Menu DIGITAL STD - DECT - SELECT SLOT, SMIQ equipped with Modulation Coder SMIQB20 and Data Generator SMIQB11 .................................................... 2.319 Signal flow of ARB generator.................................................................................. 2.323 Block diagram SMIQB60 ........................................................................................ 2.324 Signal flow SMIQB60 .............................................................................................. 2.325 Trigger signals SMIQB60........................................................................................ 2.326 ARB MOD menu ..................................................................................................... 2.327 ARB MOD - TRIGGER... menu .............................................................................. 2.329 ARB MOD - SELECT WAVEFORM... menu .......................................................... 2.331 ARB MOD - WAVEFORM INFO menu................................................................... 2.331 ARB MOD - DELETE WAVEFORM... menu .......................................................... 2.334 ARB MOD - SET SMIQ ACCORDING TO WAVEFORM menu ............................ 2.334 ARB MOD - CLOCK... menu .................................................................................. 2.336 ARB MOD - IQ OUTPUT... menu ........................................................................... 2.337 Vector modulation with an external AMIQ .............................................................. 2.338 Menu AMIQ CTRL (presetting depends on AMIQ) ................................................. 2.340 Menu AMIQ CTRL -SETUP... ................................................................................. 2.340 Menu AMIQ CTRL -SAVE/RECALL SETTINGS... ................................................. 2.342 Menu AMIQ - SELECT WAVEFORM/EXECUTE BATCH...................................... 2.343 Menu AMIQ CTRL -LEVEL..................................................................................... 2.345 Menu AMIQ CTRL - MARKER................................................................................ 2.347 Menu AMIQ CTRL – BIT ERROR RATE TEST...................................................... 2.348 BER Measurement ................................................................................................. 2.350 Operating menu for BER measurement ................................................................. 2.351 PRBS polynomials .................................................................................................. 2.357 Block diagram of noise generator and distortion simulator..................................... 2.360 Noise generator and distortion simulator in SMIQ .................................................. 2.360 Menu NOISE/DIST (presetting) .............................................................................. 2.361 Menu NOISE/DIST - POLYNOMIAL....................................................................... 2.362 AM/AM conversion.................................................................................................. 2.364 AM/PM conversion.................................................................................................. 2.364 Menu LF OUTPUT (preset setting)......................................................................... 2.368 Signal example sweep: MODE = AUTO, BLANK TIME = NORMAL ..................... 2.372 Signal example sweep: MODE = SINGLE, BLANK TIME = LONG ........................ 2.372 Menu SWEEP - FREQ............................................................................................ 2.373 Menu SWEEP - LEVEL .......................................................................................... 2.375 Menu SWEEP - LF GEN......................................................................................... 2.376 Signal example LIST mode: MODE = EXT-STEP .................................................. 2.380 Menu LIST - OPERATION page............................................................................. 2.380 Menu List - EDIT page............................................................................................ 2.382 23 E-9 Contents Fig. 2-244 Fig. 2-245 Fig. 2-246 Fig. 2-247 Fig. 2-248 Fig. 2-249 Fig. 2-250 Fig. 2-251 Fig. 2-252 Fig. 2-253 Fig. 2-254 Fig. 2-255 Fig. 2-256 Fig. 2-257 Fig. 2-258 Fig. 2-259 Fig. 2-260 Fig. 2-261 Fig. 2-262 Fig. 2-263 Fig. 2-264 Fig. 2-265 Fig. 2-266 Fig. 2-267 Fig. 2-268 Fig. 2-269 Fig. 3-1 Fig. 3-2 Fig. 3-3 Fig. 3-4 Fig. 4-1 Fig. A-1 Fig. A-2 Fig. A-3 1125.5610.12 SMIQ Menu MEM SEQ -OPERATION-page (preset setting) ........................................... 2.385 Menu MEM SEQ - EDIT page ................................................................................ 2.386 Menu UTILITIES -SYSTEM -GPIB ......................................................................... 2.387 Menu UTILITIES - SYSTEM - RS232..................................................................... 2.388 Menu UTILITIES - SYSTEM - SERDATA............................................................... 2.389 Menu UTILITIES - SYSTEM-SECURITY................................................................ 2.390 Menu UTILITIES - REF OSC (preset setting)......................................................... 2.391 Menu UTILITIES - PHASE (preset setting)............................................................. 2.392 Menu UTILITIES - PROTECT (preset setting) ....................................................... 2.393 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - ALL.............................................................................. 2.394 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - VCO SUM ................................................................... 2.395 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - VECTOR MOD menu.................................................. 2.396 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - LEV PRESET .............................................................. 2.397 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - ALC TABLE................................................................. 2.398 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - LEV ATT...................................................................... 2.399 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB – LFGEN ....................................................................... 2.400 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - CONFIG........................................................................ 2.401 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - TPOINT ........................................................................ 2.402 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - C/N MEAS .................................................................... 2.403 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - PARAM ......................................................................... 2.404 Menu UTILITIES - MOD KEY (preset setting) ........................................................ 2.405 Menu UTILITIES - AUX I/O..................................................................................... 2.406 Menu UTILITIES - BEEPER ................................................................................... 2.407 Menu UTILITIES - INSTALL, fitted with options ..................................................... 2.408 Menu STATUS page............................................................................................... 2.409 ERROR page .......................................................................................................... 2.410 Tree structure of the SCPI command systems using the SOURce system by way of example .................................................................................................................. 3.6 Instrument model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus ............. 3.205 The status -register model ...................................................................................... 3.208 Overview of the status register ............................................................................... 3.210 UTILITIES-TEST menu .............................................................................................. 4.2 Contact Assigment of the IEC-bus socket ..................................................................A.1 Pin assigment of RS-232-C connector .......................................................................A.4 Wiring of data, control and signalling lines for hardware handshake .........................A.6 24 E-9 SMIQ 3 Brief Instructions Remote Control The instrument is equipped with an IEC-bus interface according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.2 and a RS-232 interface. The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit to connect a controller for remote control. The instrument supports the SCPI version 1994.0 (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments). The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers. This section assumes basic knowledge of IEC-bus programming and operation of the controller. A description of the interface commands is to be obtained from the relevant manuals. The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax, error handling and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections. Tables provide a fast overview of the commands implemented in the instrument and the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of every command and the status registers. Detailed program examples of the main functions are to be found in annex D. The program examples for IEC-bus programming are all written in QuickBASIC. Note: In contrast to manual control, which is intended for maximum possible operating convenience, the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status. This means that when incompatible settings (e.g. activation of PM and FM at the same time) are attempted, the command is ignored and the device status remains unchanged, i.e. is not adapted to other settings. Therefore, IEC/IEEE-bus control programs should always define an initial device status (e.g. with command *RST) and then implement the required settings. 3.1 Brief Instructions The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the instrument and setting of its basic functions. 3.1.1 IEC-Bus It is assumed that the IEC-bus address, which is factory-set to 28 has not yet been changed. 1. Connect instrument and controller using IEC-bus cable. 2. Write and start the following program on the controller: CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%) Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD(generator%, 28) Inform controller about instrument address CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*RST;*CLS") Reset instrument CALL IBWRT(generator%, "FREQ 50MHz") Set frequency to 50 MHz CALL IBWRT(generator%, "POW -7.3dBm") Set output level -7.3m dBm "OUTP:STAT ON" Switch on RF output CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:SOUR INT") Set AM modulation source LFGEN CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:INT:FREQ 15kHz") Set modulation frequency to 15 kHz CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM 30PCT") Set AM modulation depth 30% CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:STAT ON") Switch on AM An amplitude-modulated signal is now applied at the output of the instrument. 3. To return to manual control, press the LOCAL key at the front panel. 1125.5555.03 3.1 E-7 Switchover to Remote Control 3.1.2 SMIQ RS-232 Interface It is assumed that the configuration of the RS-232 interface at the unit has not yet been changed. 1. Connect unit and controller using the 0-modem cable. 2. Enter the following command at the controller to configure the controller interface: mode com1: 9600, n, 8, 1 3. Create the following ASCII file: *RST;*CLS FREQ 50MHz POW -7.3dBm OUTP:STAT ON AM:SOUR INT AM:INT:FREQ 15kHz AM 30PCT AM:STAT ON Switch instrument to remote control (Return key) Reset instrument Set frequency 50 MHz Set output level -7.3 dBm Switch on RF output Set AM modulation source LFGEN Set modulation frequency 15 kHz Set AM modulation depth 30% Switch on AM (Return key) 4. Transfer ASCII file to unit via RS-232 interface. Enter the following command at the controller: copycom1: An amplitude-modulated signal is now applied at the output of the instrument. 5. To return to manual control, press the [LOCAL] key at the front panel. 3.2 Switchover to Remote Control On power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state ("LOCAL" state) and can be operated via the front panel. The instrument is switched to remote control ("REMOTE" state) IEC-bus as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller. RS-232 as soon as it receives either a carriage return (=0Dh) or a line feed (0Ah) from a controller. During remote control, operation via the front panel is disabled. The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via IEC bus (see Sections 3.2.1.3 and 3.2.2.3). Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument settings. 1125.5555.03 3.2 E-7 SMIQ Switchover to Remote Control 3.2.1 Remote Control via IEC Bus 3.2.1.1 Setting the Device Address The IEC-bus address of the instrument is factory-set to 28. It can be changed manually in the UTILITIES-SYSTEM-GPIB-ADDRESS menu or via IEC bus. Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible. Manually: Ø Call UTILITIES-SYSTEM-GPIB-ADDRESS menu Ø Enter desired address Ø Terminate input using the [1x/ENTER] key Via IEC bus: CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%) CALL IBPAD(generator%, 28) CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 20") CALL IBPAD(generator%, 20) 3.2.1.2 Open port to the instrument Inform controller about old address Set instrument to new address Inform controller about new address Indications during Remote Control The state of the remote control is evident by the words "IEC REMOTE" or "LOCAL" on the STATUS page. The STATUS page is always displayed in the REMOTE state. LOCKED indicates that the key [LOCAL] is disabled, i.e. switchover to manual operation is only possible via IEC/IEEE bus. With UNLOCKED indicated, switchover to manual control is possible via the key [LOCAL] (see also section 3.2.1.3). 3.2.1.3 Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC bus. Manually: Ø Press the [LOCAL] key. Notes: – Before switchover, command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately. – The [LOCAL] key can be disabled by the universal command LLO (see annex A) in order to prevent unintentional switchover. In this case, switchover to manual mode is only possible via the IEC bus. – The [LOCAL] key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN control line of the IEC bus (see annex A). Via IEC bus: 1125.5555.03 ... CALL IBLOC(generator%) ... 3.3 Set instrument to manual operation. E-7 Messages SMIQ 3.2.2 Remote Control via RS-232-Interface 3.2.2.1 Setting the Transmission Parameters To enable an error-free and correct data transmission, the parameters of the unit and the controller should have the same setting. To prevent any problems during binary data transmission, the RS-232 interface is set for 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit. This data format corresponds to the current IEEE P1174 standard. Parameters baud rate and handshake can be manually changed in menu UTILITIES-SYSTEM-RS-232. Ø Call UTILITIES-SYSTEM-RS232 menu Ø Select desired baudrate and handshake Ø Terminate input using the [1x/ENTER] key 3.2.2.2 Indications during Remote Control The state of the remote control is evident by the words "RS-232 REMOTE" or "LOCAL" on the STATUS page. The STATUS page is always displayed in the REMOTE state. 3.2.2.3 Return to Manual Operating Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel. ØPress the [LOCAL] key. Note: Before switchover, command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately. 3.3 Messages The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus (see annex A) can be divided into two groups: - interface messages and - device messages. 3.3.1 Interface Message Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the ATN control line being active. They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a controller which has the IEC-bus control. Interface commands can be subdivided into - universal commands and - addressed commands. Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC bus without previous addressing, addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners. The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in annex A. Some control characters are defined for the control of the RS-232-interface (see annex A) 1125.5555.03 3.4 E-7 SMIQ 3.3.2 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line not being active. ASCII code is used. The device messages are largely identical for the two interfaces (IEC bus and RS232) . A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent on the IEC bus: – Commands 1. are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the device functions and request information. The commands are subdivided according to two criteria: According to the effect they have on the instrument: 2. Setting commands cause instrument settings such as reset of the instrument or setting the output level to 1 volt. Queries cause data to be provided for output on the IEC-bus, e.g. for identification of the device or polling the active input. According to their definition in standard IEEE 488.2: Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and notation in standard IEEE 488.2. They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers, reset and selftest. Device-specific commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency setting. A majority of these commands has also been standardized by the SCPI committee (cf. Section 3.4.1). – Device responses are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement results, instrument settings and information on the instrument status (cf. Section 3.4.4). Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in Section 3.4. The commands are listed and explained in detail in Section 3.5. 3.4 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 3.4.1 SCPI Introduction SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard command set for programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI consortium is to standardize the device-specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose, a model was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices. Command systems were generated which are assigned to these functions. Thus it is possible to address the same functions with identical commands. The command systems are of a hierarchical structure. Fig. 3-1 illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SOURce, which operates the signal sources of the devices. The other examples concerning syntax and structure of the commands are derived from this command system. SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488.2, i.e. it uses the same syntactic basic elements as well as the common commands defined in this standard. Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined with greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488.2 (see Section 3.4.4, Responses to Queries). 1125.5555.03 3.5 E-7 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 3.4.2 SMIQ Structure of a Command The commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. Header and parameter are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several key words. Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header. Note: The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the instrument. Common Commands Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*" and one or several parameters, if any. Examples: *RST RESET, resets the device *ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of the event status enable registers *ESR? EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the contents of the event status register. Device-specific commands Hierarchy: Device-specific commands are of hierarchical structure (see Fig. 3-1). The different levels are represented by combined headers. Headers of the highest level (root level) have only one key word. This key word denotes a complete command system. Example: This key word denotes the command system SOURce. SOURce For commands of lower levels, the complete path has to be specified, starting on the left with the highest level, the individual key words being separated by a colon ":". Example: :SOURce:FM:EXTernal:COUPling AC This command lies in the fourth level of the SOURce system. It sets the coupling of the external signal source to AC. SOURce POWer FM AM POLarity MODE INTernal EXTernal POLarity Fig. 3-1 STATe COUPling Tree structure of the SCPI command systems using the SOURce system by way of example 1125.5555.03 3.6 E-7 SMIQ Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Some key words occur in several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, that is to say, at which position in the header of a command they are inserted. Example: SOURce:FM:POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the third command level. It defines the polarity between modulator and modulation signal. SOURce:FM:EXTernal:POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth command level. It defines the polarity between modulation voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the external signal source indicated. Optional key words: Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted. These key words are marked by square brackets in the description. The full command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard. Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words. Example: [SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet 1 This command immediately sets the offset of the signal to 1 volt. The following command has the same effect: POWer:OFFSet 1 Note: Long and short form: An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified in detail by a numeric suffix. The key words feature a long form and a short form. Either the short form or the long form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permissible. Example: STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1= STAT:QUES:ENAB 1 Note: Parameter: The short form is marked by upper-case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Upper-case and lower-case notation only serve the above purpose, the instrument itself does not make any difference between upper-case and lower-case letters. The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If several parameters are specified in a command, they are separated by a comma ",". A few queries permit the parameters MINimum, MAXimum and DEFault to be entered. For a description of the types of parameter, refer to Section 3.4.5. Example: SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation? MAXimum Response: 60 This query requests the maximal value for the attenuation. Numeric suffix: If a device features several functions or features of the same kind, e.g. inputs, the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command. Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1. Example: SOURce:FM:EXTernal2:COUPling AC This command sets the coupling of the second external signal source. 1125.5555.03 3.7 E-7 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 3.4.3 SMIQ Structure of a Command Line A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by a , a with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte. Quick BASIC automatically produces an EOI together with the last data byte. Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURce:POWer:CENTer MINimum;:OUTPut:ATTenuation 10") This command line contains two commands. The first command is part of the SOURce system and is used to specify the center frequency of the output signal. The second command is part of the OUTPut system and sets the attenuation of the output signal. If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels (see also Fig. 3-1). The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case. Example: CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURce:FM:MODE LOCKed;:SOURce:FM:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz") This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon. Both commands are part of the SOURce command system, subsystem FM, i.e. they have two common levels. When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below SOURce:FM. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows: CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURce:FM:MODE LOCKed;INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz") However, a new command line always begins with the complete path. Example: CALL IBWRT(generator%, CALL IBWRT(generator%, 3.4.4 Responses to Queries "SOURce:FM:MODE LOCKed") "SOURce:FM:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz") A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2. 1. The requested parameter is transmitted without header. Example: SOURce:EXTernal:COUPling? Response: AC 2. Maximum values, minimum values and all further quantities, which are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values. Example: FREQuency? MAX Response: 10E3 3. Numerical values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. Example: FREQuency? Response: 1E6 for 1 MHz 4. Truth values are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON). Example: OUTPut:STATe? 5. Text (character data) is returned in a short form (see also Section 3.4.5). Example: SOURce:FM:SOURce? 1125.5555.03 3.8 Response: 1 Response: INT E-7 SMIQ 3.4.5 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Parameter Most commands require a parameter to be specified. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data. The type of parameter required for the respective command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description (see Section 3.5). Numerical values Numerical values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The allowed range is –9.9E37 to +9.9E37. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not permissible. In the case of physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Permissible unit prefixes are G (giga), MA (mega), MOHM and MHZ are also permissible), K (kilo), M (milli), U (micro) and N (nano). It the unit is missing, the basic unit is used. Example: SOURce:FREQuency 1.5 kHz = SOURce:FREQuency 1.5E3 Special numerical values MIN/MAX The texts MINimum, MAXimum, DEFault, UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numerical values. In the case of a query, the numerical value is provided. Example: Setting command: SOURce:VOLTage MAXimum Query: SOURce:VOLTage? Response: 15 MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value. DEF DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command. UP/DOWN UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step. The step width can be specified via an allocated step command (see annex C, List of Commands) for each parameter which can be set via UP, DOWN. INF/NINF INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numerical values -9.9E37 or 9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as device responses. NAN Not a Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as device response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values. Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0. The OFF state (logically untrue) is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0. 0 or 1 is provided in a query. Example: Setting command: SOURce:FM:STATe ON Query: SOURce:FM:STATe? Response: 1 Text Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words, i.e. they can be entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short form of the text is provided. Example: Setting command: OUTPut:FILTer:TYPE EXTernal Query: OUTPut:FILTer:TYPE? Response: EXT Strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or "). or Example: SYSTem:LANGuage "SCPI" SYSTem:LANGuage 'SCPI' 1125.5555.03 3.9 E-7 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Block data SMIQ Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the following structure: Example: HEADer:HEADer #45168xxxxxxxx ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted. Data elements comprising more than one byte are transmitted with the byte being the first which was specified by SCPI command "FORMat:BORDer". Here, the command :SYSTem:COMMunicate: GPIB:LTERminator EOI should be used to set the delimiter mode to 'circuit message EOI only' so that an accidental LF within the data sequence is not first identified as a delimiter and thus momentarily interrupts the data transmission. The command ...LTER STANdard resets the delimiter mode. The format of the binary files within the block depends on the IEC-bus command The commands :SOURce:LIST:FREQuency :SOURce:LIST:POWer :SOURce:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency :SOURce:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer :SOURce:DATA:AM :SOURce:DATA:AMBase :SOURce:DATA:PM :SOURce:DATA:PMBase :SYSTem:MSEQuence:DWELl :SYSTem:MSEQuence:RCL use the IEEE-754 format for double precision floating point numbers. Each number is represented by 8 bytes. Example: a# = 125.345678E6 b# = 127.876543E6 CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURCE:CORRECTION:CSET:DATA:FREQ #216" + MKD$(a#) + MKD$(b#)) – '#' in the command string introduces the binary block, – '2' indicates that 2 digits specifying the length will follow next, – '16' is the length of the binary block (in bytes), here: 2 double precision floating pooint number with 8 bytes each. – The actual binary data follow now. As the function IBWRT requires a text string, MKD$ is used for the type conversion. The following ASCII format has the same effect: CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURCE:CORRECTION:CSET:DATA:FREQ 125.345678E6, 127.876543E6") 1125.5555.03 3.10 E-7 SMIQ 3.4.6 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Overview of Syntax Elements The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements. : The colon separates the key words of a command. In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. ; The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path. , The comma separates several parameters of a command. ? The question mark forms a query. * The asterisk marks a common command. " Double or single quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it. ' # The double dagger # introduces block data. A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates header and parameter. 1125.5555.03 3.11 E-7 Description of Commands SMIQ 3.5 Description of Commands 3.5.1 Notation In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then described in detail, separated according to the command system. The notation corresponds to the one of the SCPI standards to a large extent. The SCPI conformity information can be taken from the list of commands in annex C. Table of Commands Command: In the command column, the table provides an overview of the commands and their hierarchical arrangement (see indentations). Parameter: In the parameter column the requested parameters are indicated together with their specified range. Unit: The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters. Remark: In the remark column an indication is made on - whether the command does not have a query form, - whether the command has only one query form , - whether this command is implemented only with a certain option of the instrument. Indentations The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the table by means of indentations to the right. The lower the level is, the farther the indentation to the right is. Please observe that the complete notation of the command always includes the higher levels as well. Example: :SOURce:FM:MODE is represented in the table as follows: :SOURce :FM :MODE first level second level third level In the individual description, the complete notation of the command is given. An example for each command is written out at the end of the individual description. Upper/lower case notation 1125.5555.03 Upper/lower case letters serve to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description (see Section 3.4.2). The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. 3.12 E-7 SMIQ Special characters Description of Commands | A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands. These key words are indicated in the same line, they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these key words has to be indicated in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of which of the key words is indicated. Example: :SOURce :FREQuency :CW|:FIXed The two following commands of identical meaning can be formed. They set the frequency of the constantly frequent signal to 1 kHz: SOURce:FREQuency:CW 1E3 = SOURce:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in indicating the parameters marks alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the command is different, depending on which parameter is entered. Example:Selection of the parameters for the command SOURce:COUPling AC | DC If parameter AC is selected, only the AC content is fed through, in the case of DC, the DC as well as the AC content. 1125.5555.03 [ ] Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header (cf. Section 3.4.2, Optional Keywords). The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards. Parameters in square brackets can optionally be incorporated in the command or omitted as well. { } Parameters in braces can optionally be incorporated in the command either not at all, once or several times. 3.13 E-7 Description of Commands 3.5.2 SMIQ Common Commands The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. Same commands have the same effect on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*" followed by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in detail in Section 3.7. Table 3-1 Common Commands Command Parameter Unit Remark No query *CLS 0 to 255 *ESE Only query *ESR? >L *IDN? Only query *IST? Only query *OPC *OPC? Only query *OPT? Only query *PRE 0 to 255 *PSC 0|1 *RCL 0 to 50 No query No query *RST *SAV 1 to 50 *SRE 0 to 255 No query *STB? Only query *TRG No query *TST? Only query *WAI No query *CLS CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt-part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero. The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer *ESE 0 to 255 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated. Query *ESE? returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form. *ESR? STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form (0 to 255) and subsequently sets the register to zero. 1125.5555.03 3.14 E-7 SMIQ Description of Commands >L GO TO LOCAL: The IEC bus (IEEE488) includes line message REN (remote enable). If the device is controlled via a serial interface (RS-232), a remote/local switchover is not possible with this line. This new command in line with IEEE1174 has been therefore introduced so that the device can be switched to local mode via remote control (in the same way as with the front-panel LOCAL key). The device automatically goes to the remote status as soon as the first remote command has been received. The command is also of importance when the device is to be controlled alternately via the IEC/IEEE bus and the serial interface. The device should go to local before it can recognize a command from the other interface. *IDN? IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification. The device response is for example: "Rohde&Schwarz, SMIQ03B,00000001, 1.03" 03B = variant identification 00000001= serial number 1.03 = firmware version number *IST? INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form (0 | 1). The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll (cf. Section 3.6.3.2). *OPC OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request (cf. Section 3.6). *OPC? OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY returns 1, if all preceding commands have been executed. It is necessary to consider a sufficiently long time-out for the IEEE/IEC-bus. *OPT? OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed. The options are separated from each other by means of commas. Table 3-2 List of possible responses to *OPT? Response Option SM-B1 Reference oscillator OCXO SM-B5 FM/PM modulator SMIQB10 Modulation coder SMIQB11 Data generator SMIQB12 Memory extension for SMIQB11 SMIQB12 Second memory extension SMIQB14 Fading simulator SMIQB15 Second fading simulator SMIQB16 Broadband FM SMIQB17 Noise generator/distortion simulator SMIQB20 Modulation coder SMIQB21 Bit error rate test SMIQB43 Digital Standard W-CDMA SMIQB45 Digital Standard 3GPP W-CDMA SMIQB47 LOW ACP Filter SMIQB48 Enhanced Channels for 3GPP W-CDMA SMIQB49 Dynamic Fading Example for a device response: SM-B1,SM-B5,SMIQB10,SMIQB11,SMIQB12,SMIQB12,SMIQB14,SMIQB15,0 1125.5555.03 3.15 E-7 Description of Commands SMIQ *PRE 0 to 255 PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the value indicated. Query *PRE? returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form. *PSC 0 | 1 POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is maintained or reset in switching on. *PSC = 0 causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained. Thus a service request can be triggered in switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of status registers ESE and SRE. *PSC ≠ 0 resets the registers. Query *PSC? reads out the contents of the power-on-status-clear flag. The response can be 0 or 1. *RCL 0 to 50 RECALL calls the instrument state which was stored under the number supplied using command *SAV. 50 instrument states can be stored. *RST RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status. The command essentially corresponds to pressing the [PRESET] key. The state of the RF-output is an exception: The RF-output is deactivated after *RST, however, it is activated after the [PRESET] key has been pressed. The default setting is indicated in the description of the commands. *SAV 1 to 50 SAVE stores the current instrument state under the number indicated (cf. *RCL as well). *SRE 0 to 255 SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the value indicated. Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered. Query *SRE? reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form. Bit 6 is always 0. *STB? READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form. *TRG TRIGGER triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. Special trigger events can be started by command system "TRIGger" (see section "TRIGger System"). *TST? SELF TEST QUERY triggers all selftests of the instrument indicated in Chapter 4, Section "Functional Test" and outputs an error code in decimal form. *WAI WAIT-to-CONTINUE only permits the servicing of the subsequent commands after all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled (cf. Section 3.6 and "*OPC" as well). 1125.5555.03 3.16 E-7 SMIQ 3.5.3 ABORt System ABORt System The ABORt system contains the commands to abort actions triggered. After an action has been aborted, it can be triggered again at once. All commands trigger an event, thus they have no *RST value. Further commands for the trigger system of the SMIQ can be found in the TRIGger system. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :ABORt [:SWEep] No query :LIST No query :MSEQuence No query :ABORt[:SWEep] The command aborts a sweep. Example: :ABOR:SWE :ABORt:LIST The command aborts a list execution. Example: :ABOR:LIST :ABORt:MSEQuence The command aborts a Memory Sequence. Example: :ABOR:MSEQ 1125.5555.03 3.17 E-9 ARB System 3.5.4 SMIQ ARB System Refer to chapter "ARB Waveform Format" following the information on the IEC/IEEE bus commands where explanation of waveform formats and tags is provided. Command Parameter Default unit Remarks :ARB :STATe ON | OFF :SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger :WAVeform :SELect ‘name‘ :DELete ‘name‘ No query :DATA ‘name‘, Not readable :CATalog? Þ name[,name]... Query only Þn Query only :TAG? ‘ ‘ Þ Query only :FREE? Þn Query only :POINts? Þn Query only :LENGth? :TRIGger :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :DELay 0 to 65 535 (clocks) :INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 (clocks) :OUTPut with = [1] | 2 :POLarity POSitive | NEGative :DELay 0 to 524 255 :MODE USER | ‘mode_string‘ CATalog? (clocks) Þ name[,name]... Query only :ONTime 0 to 524 255 (clocks) :OFFTime 0 to 524 255 (clocks) :ASET :STATe ON | OFF :DM :IQFilter ON | OFF :IQSWap ON | OFF :BERT :TYPE ON | OFF :TRIGger :MODE ON | OFF Hz 1 kHz to 40.0 MHz :CLOCk :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :DELay 0.0 to 0.99 (clocks) :LEVel -3 to 6 dB :IQ :MODE :SKEW MANuell | AUTO ps -1000...1000 :ARB:STATe ON | OFF This command switches on (ON) or off (OFF) the arbitrary waveform generator. Example: :ARB:STAT ON *RST value is OFF 1125.5555.03 3.18 E-9 SMIQ ARB System :ARB:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger This command configures the sequence control of the ARB mode. AUTO The waveform is repeated in cycles. RETRigger Cyclic repetition; new start upon trigger. AAUTo Armed Auto; starts after a trigger event, further triggers are ignored. ARETrigger Armed Retrigger; starts after a trigger event, each new trigger initiates a new start. Example: :ARB:SEQ RETR *RST value is AUTO :ARB:WAVeform:SELect ‘ ‘ This command is used to select a waveform to be the active waveform. Example: :ARB:WAV:SEL ‘name‘ :ARB:WAVeform:DELete ‘ ‘ This command is used to select a waveform to be deleted. This command triggers an event and, therefore, has no *RST value. Example: :ARB:WAV:DEL ‘name‘ :ARB:WAVeform:DATA ‘ ‘, This command is used to load waveform data into the SMIQ and store them under a name. Refer to chapter "ARB Waveform Format" for more detailed information on this command. Example: :ARB:WAV:DATA ‘name‘ :ARB:WAVeform:CATalog? This command calls the list of all waveforms. Example: :ARB:WAV:CAT? :ARB:WAVeform:CATalog:LENGth? This command requests for the number of waveforms in the list. Example: :ARB:WAV:CAT:LENG? :ARB:WAVeform:TAG? ‘ ‘ This command requests for the content of a tag. Refer to the following chapter "ARB Waveform Format" for more detailed information on tags. Example: :ARB:WAV:TAG ‘tagname‘ 1125.5555.03 3.19 E-9 ARB System SMIQ :ARB:WAVeform:FREE? This command requests for free memory space for further waveforms. Example: :ARB:WAV:FREE? :ARB:WAVeform:POINts? This command returns the number of samples contained in a waveform. Example: :ARB:WAV:POIN? :ARB:TRIGger:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal This command allows for configuration of the trigger source. INT Triggering via IEC/IEEE bus or using the Execute comment of manual control. EXT Triggering via the external trigger input. Example: :ARB:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value INT :ARB:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 65 535 This command is used to enter the trigger delay (as number of samples). Example: :ARB:TRIG:DEL 234 *RST value is 0 :ARB:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 This command sets the time of trigger inhibition (as number of samples). Example: :ARB:TRIG:INH 345 *RST value is 0 :ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:POLarity POSitive | NEGative This command is used to define the signal polarity at the trigger output. l POSitive positive voltage with active state NEGative voltage 0 or low, positive with active state Example: :ARB:TRIG:OUTP2:POL POS *RST value is NEG :ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:DELay 0 to 524 255 This command defines the signal delay at the trigger output indicated as number of samples. Example: :ARB:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 765 *RST value is 0 :ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:MODE USER | ‘mode_string‘ This command allows for selection of a mode for generation of the trigger output signals. The counters for ON TIME and OFF TIME are set. Example: :ARB:TRIG:OUTP2:MODE USER *RST value is USER :ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:MODE:CATalog? This command initiates the output of a list of all available modes. Example: :ARB:TRIG:OUTP2:MODE:CAT? 1125.5555.03 3.20 E-9 SMIQ ARB System :ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:ONTime 0 to 524 255 This command sets the length of the active state of output trigger signals (indicated as number of samples). Setting is only possible, if :ARB:TRIG:OUTP:MODE is set to USER. Example: :ARB:TRIG:OUTP2:ONT 765 *RST value is 0 :ARB:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:OFFTime 0 to 524 255 This command sets the length of the non-active state of output trigger signals (indicated as number of samples). Setting is only possible, if :ARB:TRIG:OUTP:MODE is set to USER. Example: :ARB:TRIG:OUTP2:OFFT 765 *RST value is 0 :ARB:ASET:STATe ON | OFF This command is used to switch on (ON) or off (OFF) the automatic setting of the SMIQ parameters by the waveform to be loaded. Example: :ARB:ASET:STAT ON *RST value is OFF :ARB:ASET:DM:IQFilter ON | OFF This command is used to set the parameter IQ FILTER in the VECTOR MOD menu (ON) or it remains unaffected (OFF). Commands :DM:IQ:FILT:STAT and :DM:IQ:FILT:FREQ. Example: *RST value is OFF :ARB:ASET:DM:IQF ON :ARB:ASET:DM:IQSWap ON | OFF This command is used to set the parameter IQ SWAP in the VECTOR MOD menu (ON) or it remains unaffected (OFF). Command :DM:IQSW:STAT. Example: *RST value is OFF :ARB:ASET:DM:IQSW ON :ARB:ASET:BERT:TYPE ON | OFF This command is used to set the type of PRBS in the BERT menu (ON) or it remains unaffected (OFF). Command :BERT:SET:TYPE. Example *RST value is OFF :ARB:ASET:BERT:TYPE ON :ARB:ASET:TRIGger:MODE ON | OFF This command is used to set the parameters TRIGGER OUT1 MODE and TRIGGER OUT2 MODE in the ARB MOD TRIGGER...menu. Command :ARB:TRIG:OUTP:MODE. Example: *RST value is OFF :ARB:ASET:TRIG:MODE ON :ARB:CLOCk 1kHz to 40.0 MHz This command specifies the entry value for the sample clock. Example: :ARB:CLOC 4.096MHz 1125.5555.03 3.21 *RST value is 0 E-9 ARB System SMIQ :ARB:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal This command is used to select the source for the sample clock. INTernal The internal clock generator is used. EXTernal The clock is applied externally at the socket. Example: :ARB:CLOC:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT :ARB:CLOCk:DELay 0.0 to 0.99 This command is used to set the delay of the modulation signal against the clock signal. Example: :ARB:CLOC:DEL 0.55 *RST value is 0 :ARB:IQ:LEVel –3 dB to +6 dB This command sets the IQ level referred to maximum input level. Example: :ARB:IQ:LEV 1 *RST value is 0 :ARB:IQ:LEVel:MODE MANuell | AUTO This command is used to select the operating mode for setting the IQ level. MANual Level setting with subsequent entry. AUTO Automatic level setting to 0.5 V. Example: :ARB:IQ:LEV:MODE MAN *RST value is AUTO :ARB:IQ:SKEW -1000...1000 ps The command determines the delay between I and Q channel. Example: :ARB:IQ:SKEW –250ps 1125.5555.03 3.22 *RST value is 0 E-9 SMIQ ARB System 3.5.4.1 ARB Waveform Format Waveform format The waveform format is used for transmission via the IEC/IEEE bus and the serial interface, it is packed in a binary block command. Tags A tag-oriented format is used. Tags are self-contained information units. They have the general format {Name: Data} or {Name-length: Data} The colon separates the name and data sections. For the sake of clarity the colon is always followed by a blank. Name identifies the day. It is always specified in upper-case characters. Data are tag-specific but in most cases plain text in ASCII format. Length indicates the number of bytes of the WAVEFORM tag and consists of: number of digits of the Start-value + length of ",#" (2 bytes) + number of I/Q pairs * 4 (1 to 7) (2 bytes for each I and Q-value). Several tags in one Tags may be interleaved. Normally the order of the tags within a waveform is irrelevant, but there may be exceptions. All tags can but need not be contained in waveform a waveform. Exceptions are described with the individual tags. Unknown tags are not evaluated by the SMIQ but are stored unchanged and without an error message and can be read again. The following tags are defined: {TYPE: magic, xxxxxxxx} (indispensable) The TYPE tag identifies this waveform as a valid SMIQ waveform. The tag must be the first tag in the waveform. xxxxxxxx is an ASCII-coded checksum over the data range of the WAVEFORM tag in this waveform. It is calculated by the following alogorithm where 'start' is a pointer to the first byte after the double dagger '#' sign in the WAVEFORM tag and 'length' denotes the number of bytes between 'start' and the final brace (excluding the latter; 'length' must be a multiple of 4): UINT32 checksum(void *start, UINT32 length) { UINT32 i, result = 0xA50F74FF; for(i=0; i < length/4; i++) result = result ^ ((UINT32 *)start)[i]; return(result); } The checksum is used for recognizing transmission errors. If the TYPE tag contains 0 or a nonnumerical value for the checksum, it is ignored by the SMIQ. 'magic' identifies the type of the waveform and has the following value: WV The waveform is a complete, selfcontained waveform. When already available on the target medium, the previous version is overwritten. Note: Because of the flexible, tag-based form of the waveforms, a version number is not required. 1125.5555.03 3.23 E-9 ARB System SMIQ {CLOCK: frequency} (indispensable) This tag specifies the clock frequency with which the waveform should be output. A query of ARB:CLOCk? after loading the waveform returns the values set by means of the {CLOCK:...} tag. {COMMENT: string} (Important for TYPE = WV_ADD) The tag contains a plain-text ASCII string of any length. The string is not evaluated in the SMIQ, it serves for the output of keywords on the PC and for describing the waveform. The string may contain all printable ASCII characters except the closing brace. {COPYRIGHT: string} (optional) This tag contains the name under which WinIQSIM (or other programs for waveform generation) are registered. The string may contain all printable ASCII characters except the closing brace. {DATE: yyyy-mm-dd;hh:mm:ss} (optional) This tag contains date and time at which the waveform was generated. The year should be specified with four digits. The SMIQ does not evaluate this tag. {WAVEFORM-length: 0,#xxxxxxxxxxxx…} This tag contains the actual waveform data. (indispensable) The quantity length indicates the number of bytes of the WAVEFORM tag and consists of: + length of ",#" + number of I/Q pairs * 4 (2 bytes) (2 bytes for each I and Q-value). Example: {WAVEFORM-403: 0,# I Q I Q I Q I Q ......... I Q } 403 Bytes xxxxxxx… are binary(!) data, that alternately contain I and Q samples, the first sample being a I sample. Each sample consists of two bytes, the least-significant one (LSByte) is the first. The two bytes of a sample cover the value range 0x300 to 0xFD00 (0x768 to 64768). This value is transferred to the D/A converter unchanged. 1125.5555.03 3.24 E-9 SMIQ ARB System Different output levels are applied to the output connectors of the SMIQ: Binary value of the sample Asymmetric outputs identical with the value of the waveform D/A converter amplitude Vp at 50 Ω between inner and outer conductor of I and Q output I Vp Valid as Q output also! OUTP:I|Q FIX 0x300 (768) 0x8000 (32768) 0xFD00 (64768) 0V 0.25 V 0.5 V OUTP:I|Q VAR 0x300 0V OUTP:I|Q INV 0x8000 (32768) 0xFD00 (64768) (768) 0.5 V 1V Same level as the waveform for VAR, phase shifted by 180° 3.5.4.2 Creating a Waveform „Manually“ We will use to example of a sine function in the I channel and a cosine function in the Q channel, each with 20 points, to explain how a waveform file SICO.WV is generated. The sine and cosine values are calculated by a short program written in the programming language C (see the following example for creating a C-program). They are stored in the file SICO.TXT as follows: Contents of SICO.TXT: Sine (I) Cosine (Q) 0.000000 1.000000 0.309017 0.951057 0.587785 0.809017 0.809017 0.587785 0.951057 0.309017 1.000000 -0.000000 0.951056 -0.309017 0.809017 -0.587785 0.587785 -0.809017 0.309017 -0.951056 -0.000000 -1.000000 -0.309017 -0.951057 -0.587785 -0.809017 -0.809017 -0.587785 -0.951056 -0.309017 -1.000000 0.000000 -0.951056 0.309017 -0.809017 0.587785 -0.587785 0.809017 -0.309017 0.951057 1125.5555.03 The decimal values in SICO.TXT should be normalized such that they are in the between –1.0 and +1.0. The waveform file SICO.WV will be based on the contents of this file. 3.25 E-9 ARB System SMIQ To be read by the SMIQ these waveform data must be coded binary and packed into an appropriate WAVEFORM information unit. The SMIQ recognizes a great variety of information units called tags. A tag consists of a name and a data set and is enclosed in curved brackets. The tag is a kind of label carrying the information what the SMIQ should do with the data set (see also section „ARB Waveform Format“ and step 3 of the following instructions). The following steps outline how to create the waveform file SICO.WV: Step 1 The values from the file SICO.TXT must be converted into binary format consisting of integer numbers without a sign a with 16-bit width. The numeric range between –1.0 and +1.0 corresponds to the modulation range of the waveform D/A converter of 64000. +1.0 → 0.0 → -1.0 → 64768 32768 768 ü ý 64000 þ A further C-program is suitable for creating the binary data set from the ASCII values stored in SICO.TXT file (see following example for creating a C-program). This program stores the binary data set to a file called SICO.WV. The contents of the file SICO.WV reads as follows: IQIQIQIQIQIQIQI ... IQ Explanation: Step 2 There is no readable representation for binary values in this document. This is why we use the sequence IQIQIQ to characterize the binary code in the present example. The file SICO.WV contains now the binary data set corresponding to the 20 I/Q pairs. Before this binary data set can be further processed in step 3, the TYPE tag {TYPE: WV, xxxxxxx} must be placed in front. The TYPE tag must be the first entry in a WAVEFORM. The TYPE tag identifies the waveform as a valid SMIQ waveform. WV denotes that the waveform is closed upon itself. xxxxxxx is the checksum of the waveform. To simplify our example 0 is used, i.e., the SMIQ does not evaluate a checksum. To enter the TYPE tag in the SICO.WV file an ASCII editor which is able to handle binary data as well, e.g. the Microsoft Windows editor NOTEPAD or multi edit from AMERICAN CYBERNETICS, must be used. Now the contents of the SICO.WV file read: {TYPE: WV, 0} IQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQI ... IQ 1125.5555.03 3.26 E-9 SMIQ Step 3 ARB System The binary data must now be packed into a WAVEFORM tag with the following structure: {WAVEFORM-Length:ÀÙStart,#IQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQI ... IQ} The WAVEFORM tag consists of the following characters and data: { Opens each tag. WAVEFORM Name of the tag for waveform. - Separates the name from the length indication. Length Length of the data set Length indicates the number of bytes of the data set and consists of: number of digits of the Start-value + length of ",#" + number of I/Q pairs * 4 (1 to 7, in our example 1) (2 bytes) (2 bytes for each I- and Q-value). In our example containing a sine and a cosine with 20 pairs for each wave and with the start address 0 in the SMIQ’s output memory, the resulting length is 83. :ÀÙ Separates the name and length from the remainder of the data set. The blank ÀÙ can be omitted. Start Address in the output memory of the SMIQ used to store the following samples. In our example and most applications, this will be '0'. ,# Indicates the beginning of the binary data. IQIQIQ Binary data set. The binary data contain the I and Q values in alternate order, the first value is an I value. Each value consists of 2 Bytes, starting with the least significant bit. } Terminates each tag. The editor mentioned above which can handle binary data is now used to place the string "{WAVEFORM-83:ÀÙ0,#" in front and '}' at the end of the data set. The contents of the waveform file SICO.WV for 20 I/Q pairs and start address 0 in the SMIQ’s RAM is now ready for operation and reads. {TYPE: WV, 0} 20 I/Q pairs = 80 bytes {WAVEFORM-83: 0,# I Q I Q I Q I Q ... I Q } 83 bytes The tags TYPE and WAVEFORM are mandatory for each waveform. All other tags described in section „ARB Waveform Format“ are optional and can be inserted after the TYPE tag in arbitrary order, e.g. {TYPE: WV,0} {COMMENT: I/Q=sine/cosine, 20 points, clock 10 MHz} {CLOCK: 10e6} {FILTER: 2,5MHz} {WAVEFORM-83:ÀÙ0,#IQIQIQIQIQIQ ... IQ} 1125.5555.03 3.27 E-9 ARB System SMIQ C-program for creating the file SICO.TXT containing 20 sine and cosine pairs: #include #include #include Contents of the file SICO.TXT: void main (void) { #define SAMPLES 20 int i; float grad,rad; FILE *logging_fp; logging_fp = fopen("SICO.TXT", "w"); for (i = 0; i < SAMPLES; i++) { grad = (360.0 / (float)(SAMPLES)) * (float)i; rad = grad * (3.141592654/180.0); fprintf (logging_fp,"%f %f\n",sin(rad),cos(rad)); } fclose(logging_fp); } Sinus (I) Cosinus (Q) 0.000000 1.000000 0.309017 0.951057 0.587785 0.809017 0.809017 0.587785 0.951057 0.309017 1.000000 -0.000000 0.951056 -0.309017 0.809017 -0.587785 0.587785 -0.809017 0.309017 -0.951056 -0.000000 -1.000000 -0.309017 -0.951057 -0.587785 -0.809017 -0.809017 -0.587785 -0.951056 -0.309017 -1.000000 0.000000 -0.951056 0.309017 -0.809017 0.587785 -0.587785 0.809017 -0.309017 0.951057 Extract from a C-program generating a binary data set from the I/Q pairs in the file SICO.TXT and storing the result to file SICO.WV: : FILE *fp_sour_i,*fp_sour_q,*fp_dest; unsigned int i_uint, q_uint; : fp_sour = fopen("SICO.TXT", "rt" ); fp_dest = fopen("SICO.WV", "wb" ); : while (1) { //Read I/Q pair from ASCII file if (fscanf (fp_sour,"%f %f",&i_float, &q_float) == EOF) break; //Convert I/Q pair to unsigned integer i_uint = (unsigned int)(32768.0 + (i_float*32000.0)+0.5); i_uint &= 0xFFFC; //Mask marker bits q_uint = (unsigned int)(32768.0 + (q_float*32000.0)+0.5); q_uint &= 0xFFFC; //Mask marker bits //Write converted I/Q pair to waveform file fwrite (&i_uint,1,2,fp_dest); fwrite (&q_uint,1,2,fp_dest); } : 1125.5555.03 3.28 E-9 SMIQ ARB System 3.5.4.3 Converting a Waveform with the Application Software AMIQ-K2 The application software AMIQ-K2 from R&S is distributed free of charge and allows to convert a large variety of I/Q data sets to SMIQ waveform. Moreover, AMIQ-K2 can be used to remote-control some important SMIQ functions, to load and to store waveforms. This application software is available in the internet (http://www.rsd.de) under the path: Products → Test and Measurement → Signal Generation → IQ modulation generator AMIQ → or IQ simulation software WinIQSIM → or from each R&S representative. The control sequence Select Source File(s) Type Mathcad (mixed) Source File SICO.TXT Transmit Destination WV formatted SICO.WV allows to quickly generate a waveform that is ready to operate from the file SICO.TXT containing the I/Q pairs in alternate order. 3.5.4.4 AMIQ Compatible Commands for Transmission and Administration of Waveforms See AMIQ Operating Manual for a detailed description of the commands. AMIQ command Parameter SMIQ command and Parameter :ARB :MMEMory :WAVeform: :DATA ‘listname‘, DATA ‘listname‘, :DATA? ‘listname‘, 'tagname‘Þ tag :DATA? ‘listname‘,'tagname' Þ tag ‘listname‘ :DELete ‘listname‘ Þ name[,name]... :CATalog? Þ name[,name]... :DELete :CATalog? :LENGth? :LOAD Þn LENGth? Þ n RAM,‘listname‘ :SELect ‘listname‘ :DATA? RAM,‘tagname‘ Þ tag :TAG? ‘tagname‘Þ tag :NAME? Þ listname :SELect? :MEMory 1125.5555.03 3.29 E-9 BERT System 3.5.5 SMIQ BERT System Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :BERT :STATe ON | OFF :SEQuence AUTO | SINGle :SETup :MCOunt 1 to 4294967294 :MERRor 1 to 4294967294 :TYPE PRBS9 | PRBS11 | PRBS15 | PRBS16 | PRBS20 | PRBS21 | PRBS23 :DATA [:POLarity] NORMal | INVerted :CLOCk [:POLarity] RISing | FALLing :RESTart INTernal | EXTernal :DENable OFF | LOW | HIGH :MASK OFF | LOW | HIGH :IGNore OFF | ONE | ZERO Alias :UNIT SCIentific | ENGineering | PCT | PPM :STARt (without) :STOP (without) Query only :RESULT? :BERT:STATe ON | OFF This command switches the bit error rate test on or off. The command :BERT:STARt sets the status internally to ON, while the command :BERT:STOP sets it to OFF. Example: *RST value is OFF :BERT:STAT ON :BERT:SEQuence AUTO | SINGle This command switches between continuous (AUTO) and single measurement (SINGle). A single measurement is terminated once the set number of data bits or error bits is reached. The continuous measurement is a sequence of automatically started single measurements. By means of the command :BERT:STARt, the status is internally set to AUTO. Example: 1125.5555.03 *RST value is AUTO :BERT:SEQ SING 3.30 E-9 SMIQ BERT System :BERT:SETup:MCOunt 1 to 4294967294 This command sets the total number of data bits to be measured (data excluded by :BERT:SETup:DENable do not count). When the internal data counter reaches or – in integrated BER test – exceeds this number, the single BER measurement is terminated. If this is followed by the query:BERT:RES?, the SMIQ signals with the fourth result that a BER measurement has been completed. This fourth result then has the value 1. 32 Valid value range: 1 to 4294967295 (2 -1) Example: :BERT:SET:MCO 1e6 *RST value is 10.000.000 :BERT:SETup:MERRor 1 to 4294967294. This command sets the number of error bits to be measured. When the internal bit error counter reaches or – in integrating BER test – exceeds this number, the SMIQ responds to a :BERT:RES? query by signalling with the fourth result = 1 that a single BER measurement has been terminated. 32 Valid value range: 1 to 4294967295 (2 -1) Example: :BERT:SET:MERR 100 *RST value is 100 :BERT:SETup:TYPE PRBS9 | PRBS11 | PRBS15 | PRBS16 | PRBS20 | PRBS21 | PRBS23 With this command, various sequence lengths can be set for the pseudo-random bit sequence. The data generated by the PRBS generator are used as a reference. Example: :BERT:SET:TYPE PRBS15 *RST value is PRBS9 :BERT:SETup:DATA[:POLarity] NORMal | INVerted This command defines the polarity of the external data signal. NORMal: High level stands for a logic 1, low level for a logic 0. INVerted: Low level stands for a logic 1, high level for a logic 0. Example: :BERT:SET:DATA INV *RST value is NORM :BERT:SETup:CLOCk[:POLarity] RISing | FALLing This command defines which edge of the externally fed clock signal is active. Example: :BERT:SET:CLOC FALL *RST value is RIS :BERT:SETup:RESTart INTernal | EXTernal INTernal The reset signal for the BER test is generated internally by the program. This setting is suited for random sequences fitting cyclically into the SMIQ memory and therefore allowing an uninterrupted repetition of the random sequence. EXTernal If the random sequence cannot be continued without interruption at memory wraparound, the BER test has to be stopped in time and then restarted at the beginning of the data sequence. The measurement is stopped and started via a 0-1-0 edge at the restart input. Partial BER results (data and error bits) are added up until the predefined total number of data or error bits is reached or exceeded. These partial results are not affected by a restart. Example: :BERT:SET:RES EXT *RST value is INT 1125.5555.03 3.31 E-9 BERT System SMIQ :BERT:SETup:DENable OFF | LOW | HIGH The SMIQ has an input (data enable) allowing the temporary suspension of the BER test for processing data bursts or data interrupted by other data. This command configures this input. OFF Any signal applied to the input is ignored; all data are used for the BER measurement. HIGH If a high level signal is applied to the input, its data bits are counted and the bit errors detected and counted. If a low level signal is applied, the measurement is interrupted. LOW If a low level signal is applied to the input, its data bits are counted and the bit error detected and counted. If a high level signal is applied, the measurement is interrupted. Example: :BERT:SET:DEN HIGH *RST value is OFF :BERT:SETup:MASK OFF | LOW | HIGH This command is equivalent (alias) to the command :BERT:SETup:DENable described above. Example: *RST value is OFF :BERT:SET:MASK HIGH :BERT:SETup:IGNore OFF | ONE | ZERO This command determines what to do with faulty data (frame errors) that were set to 0 or 1. OFF Pattern Ignore is not active. ONE Bit sequences consisting of 30 or more subsequent "1" data are not used (i.e. ignored) for the BER test. ZERO Bit sequences consisting of 30 or more subsequent "0" data are not used (i.e. ignored) for the BER measurement. Example: :BERT:SET:IGN ONE *RST value is OFF :BERT:UNIT SCIentific | ENGineering | PCT | PPM This command sets the unit for displaying the error rate. It is only for display on SMIQ; it has no effect on results queried by :BERT:RES?. Example: *RST value is ENG :BERT:SET PCT :BERT:STARt This command starts a bit error rate test. The command :BERT:STAT is set to ON and BERT:SEQ to AUTO. Example: :BERT:STAR :BERT:STOP The command stops an ongoing bit error rate test. If no measurement is in progress, this command has no effect. :BERT:STAT is set to OFF. Example: 1125.5555.03 :BERT:STOP 3.32 E-9 SMIQ BERT System :BERT:RESult? This query refers to the result of the most recent BER measurement. The response consists of seven results separated by commas. In the first measurement following the start, intermediate results for the number of data bits, error bits and error rate are also queried. In the following measurements (only for :BERT:SEQ AUTO), only the final results of each single measurement are queried. Example: :BERT:RES? Response: "10000,5,5E-4,1,1,1,1" Result: 1 ,2,3 ,4,5,6,7 Result 1 Number of data bits in current query. Result 2 Number of error bits in current query. Result 3 Error rate. If no termination criterion has been reached since the beginning of the BER test, the current quotient of "Number of error bits" and "Number of data bits" is entered. As soon as at least one final result has been reached in continuous measurement, the most recent final result is entered. This means that the displayed error rate changes less rapidly. Result 4 1 A BER measurement has been terminated, i.e. the number of data bits or error bits predefined by commands :BERT:SET MCOunt or :BERT:SET MERRor is reached, or the measurement was stopped by the command :BERT:STOP. 0 The BER measurement has not been terminated. Result 5 1 Following the start of a BER measurement (by the command :BERT: STARt), an edge was detected on the clock line. 0 The clock line is not active. Result 6 1 Following the start of a BER measurement (by the command :BERT: STARt), a data change edge was detected on the data line. This data change only refers to clocked data. If there is no clock, no data change is detected. 0 The data line is not active. Result 7 1 The BER measurement is synchronized, i.e. both clock and data line are active and the "Number of error bits" to "Number of data bits" ratio is better than 0.1, so the measurement result can be assumed to be realistic. 0 The BER measurement is not synchronized. 1125.5555.03 3.33 E-9 BLER System 3.5.6 SMIQ BLER System Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :BLER :STATe ON | OFF :SEQuence AUTO | SINGle :SETup :MCOunt 1 to 4294967294 :MERRor 1 to 4294967294 :TYPE? → CRC16 Query only :DATA [:POLarity] NORMal | INVerted :CLOCk [:POLarity] :DENable RISing | FALLing LOW | HIGH :UNIT SCIentific | ENGineering | PCT | PPM :STARt (without) :STOP (without) Query only :RESULT? :BLER:STATe ON | OFF This command switches the block error rate measurement on or off. The :BLER:STARt command sets the status internally to ON, while the :BLER:STOP command sets it to OFF. Example: *RST value is OFF :BLER:STAT ON :BLER:SEQuence AUTO | SINGle This command switches between continuous (AUTO) and single measurement (SINGle). A single measurement is terminated once the set number of data blocks or the number of errors is reached. The continuous measurement is a sequence of automatically started single measurements. Command :BLER:STARt sets the status internally to AUTO. Example: *RST value is AUTO :BLER:SEQ SING :BLER:SETup:MCOunt 1 to 4294967294 This command sets the total number of data blocks to be measured. The single BLER measurement is terminated when the internal data counter has reached this number. If this is followed by the query :BLER:RES?, the SMIQ signals with the fourth result that a BLER measurement has been completed. This fourth result has the value 1. 32 Valid value range : 1 to 4294967295 (2 -1) Example: :BLER:SET:MCO 1e6 *RST value is 10 000 000 :BLER:SETup:MERRor 1 to 4294967294 1125.5555.03 3.34 E-9 SMIQ BLER System This command sets the number of errors to be measured. When the internal block error counter reaches this number, the SMIQ responds to a :BLER:RES? query by signalling with the fourth result = 1 that a single BLER measurement has been terminated. 32 Valid value range: 1 to 4294967295 (2 -1) Example: :BLER:SET:MERR 100 *RST value is 100 :BLER:SETup:TYPE? With this command the type of measurement can be queried. At present, only CRC16 is possible. Example: :BLER:SET:TYPE? *RST value is CRC16 :BLER:SETup:DATA[:POLarity] NORMal | INVerted This command defines the polarity of the external data signal. NORMal: High level corresponds to logic 1, low level to logic 0. INVerted: Low level corresponds to logic 1, high level to logic 0. Example: :BLER:SET:DATA INV :BLER:SETup:CLOCk[:POLarity] RISing | FALLing This command defines which edge of the external clock signal is active. Example: :BLER:SET:CLOC FALL *RST value is NORM *RST value is RIS :BLER:SETup:DENable LOW | HIGH The SMIQ is equipped with an input (Data Enable) that allows the data stream to be masked. This command configures this input. HIGH The bits applied at high level of the Data Enable signal are interpreted as information bits. At low level they are interpreted as checksum bits. LOW The bits applied at low level of the Data Enable signal are interpreted as information bits. At high level they are interpreted as checksum bits. Example: :BLER:SET:DEN HIGH *RST value is LOW :BLER:UNIT SCIentific | ENGineering | PCT | PPM This command sets the unit for error rate display. It is only valid for display on SMIQ and has no effect on the results queried by :BLER:RES?. Example: *RST value is ENG :BLER:SET PCT :BLER:STARt This command starts a block error rate measurement. The :BLER:STAT command is set to ON, command BLER:SEQ to AUTO. Example: :BLER:STAR :BLER:STOP The command stops an ongoing block error rate measurements. If no measurement is in progress, this command has no effect. The command:BLER:STAT is set to OFF. Example: 1125.5555.03 :BLER:STOP 3.35 E-9 BLER System SMIQ :BLER:RESult? This command queries the result of the most recent BLER measurement. The response consists of seven values separated by commas. In the first measurement after the start, intermediate results are also queried for the number of data blocks, errors and error rate. In the subsequent measurements (only :BLER:SEQ AUTO), only the final results of the single measurements are queried. Example: :BLER:RES? Response: "10000,5,5E-4,1,1,1,1" Value 1 ,2, 3 ,4,5,6,7 Value 1 Number of data blocks in current query. Value 2 Number of errors incurrent query. Value 3 Error rate: If no termination criterion has been reached since the beginning of the BLER measurement, the current quotient of "Number of errors" and "Number of data blocks" is entered. As soon as at least one final result has been reached in a continuous measurement, the most recent final result is entered. This means that the displayed error rate changes less quickly. Value 4 1 A BLER measurement has been terminated, i.e. the number of data blocks or errors predefined by the:BLER:SET MCOunt or :BLER:SET MERRor command is reached, or the BLER measurement was stopped by command :BLER:STOP. 0 The BLER measurement has not been terminated. Value 5 1 After the start of a BLER measurement (command :BLER: STARt), an edge was detected on the clock line. 0 The clock line is not active. Value 6 1 After the start of a BLER measurement (command :BLER:STARt), a data change edge was detected on the data line. This data change only affects the clocked data. If there is no clock, no data change is detected. 0 The data line is not active. Value 7 1 The BLER measurement is synchronized, i.e. the clock and data line are active and the "Number of errors" to "Number of data blocks" ratio is better than 0.1, so that the measurement result can be assumed to be realistic. 0 The BLER measurement is not synchronized. 1125.5555.03 3.36 E-9 SMIQ CALibration System 3.5.7 CALibration System The CALibration system contains the commands to calibrate the SMIQ. On triggering the calibration by means of :MEASure , response "0" displays a faultless calibration, response "1" means that an error has occurred during calibration. As to the meaning of the data in the case of query :DATA?, cf. Chapter 2, Section "Calibration". Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :CALibration :ALL :FSIM Query only [MEAsure]? :LATTenuation [:MEASure]? Query only :LEVel :DATA? :STATe Query only ON | OFF :LPReset [:MEASure]? Query only :DATA? Query only :NDSim [:MEASure]? Query only :ROSCillator [:DATA] 0 to 4095 :VSUMmation [:MEASure]? Query only :OFFS? Query only :DAC? Query only :KOS? Query only :VMODulation Query only [:MEASure]? :LFGenerator Query only [:MEASure]? :CALibration[:ALL]? This command triggers all internal calibrations which do not require any external measuring equipment. The command triggers an event and thus has no *RST value. Example: :CAL:ALL? :CALibration:FSIM[:MEASure]? The command triggers a calibration measurement of the DC offset of the fading simulator. The command triggers an event and thus has no *RST value. Example: :CAL:FSIM? :CALibration:LATTenuation[:MEASure]? The command triggers a calibration measurement of the level attenuation of function envelope control. The command triggers an event and thus has no *RST value. Example: :CAL:LPR:MEAS? Response: 0 1125.5555.03 3.37 E-9 CALibration System SMIQ :CALibration:LEVel This node provides the commands for the management of the level correction table. The corresponding data are permanently stored in the instrument and cannot be changed. The instrument includes different level correction tables. The tables to be used are selected depending on the set frequency and modulation type. The :STATe ON command activates the level correction table corresponding to the instrument setup. :CALibration:LEVel:DATA? The command queries the level correction data. It returns all level correction data in the format fixed in the :FORMat system. Example: :CAL:LEV:DATA? :CALibration:LEVel:STATe ON | OFF The command switches on or off internal level correction. Example: :CAL:LEV:STAT OFF *RST value is ON :CALibration:LPReset The commands to measure the values for the level presetting table are under this node (Level PReset). :CALibration:LPReset[:MEASure]? The command triggers a calibration measurement. The command triggers an event and thus has no *RST value. Example: :CAL:LPR:MEAS? Response: 0 :CALibration:LPReset:DATA? The command queries the correction data. It returns all correction data in the format fixed in the :FORMat system. Example: :CAL:LPR:DATA? :CALibration:NDSim[:MEASure]? This command triggers an offset calibration of module NDSIM. Example: :CAL:NDS? Answer: 0 if OK, 1 if faulty :CALibration:ROSCillator The commands to calibrate the reference oscillator are under this node. :CALibration:ROSCillator[:DATA] 0 to 4095 The command enters the correction data. For an exact definition of the calibration value, cf. Section 2. Example: :CAL:ROSC:DATA 2048 1125.5555.03 3.38 E-9 SMIQ CALibration System :CALibration:VSUMmation The commands to determine the support values for the frequency setting are under this node. :CALibration:VSUMmation [:MEASure]? The command triggers a calibration measurement. The command triggers an event and thus has no *RST value. Example: :CAL:VSUM:MEAS? Answer: 0 :CALibration:VSUMmation:OFFS? :CALibration:VSUMmation:DAC? :CALibration:VSUMmation:KOS? The commands query the calibration data (see service manual). they return all correction data in the format fixed in the :FORMat system. Example: :CAL:VSUM:OFFS? :CALibration:VMODulation[:MEASure]? This command triggers a calibration measurement for the vector modulation. Since it triggers an event it has no default setting value. Example: :CAL:VMOD:MEAS? Answer: 0 :CALibration:LFGenerator[:MEASure]? This command triggers a calibration measurement for the LF generator. Since it triggers an event it has no default setting value. Example: :CAL:LFG:MEAS? Answer: 0 1125.5555.03 3.39 E-9 DIAGnostic System 3.5.8 SMIQ DIAGnostic System The DIAGnostic system contains the commands for diagnostic test and service of the instrument. SCPI does not define DIAGnostic commands, the commands listed here are SMIQ-specific. All DIAGnostic commands are queries which are not influenced by *RST. Hence no default setting values are stated. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :DIAGnostic :CLISt :CHECksum :CALCulate Query only :DATA? :CNMeasure :MODE CN | CARRier | NOISe :DLISt :CHECksum :CALCulate Query only :DATA? :INFO :CCOunt Query only :ATTenuator1|2|3|4|5|6? Query only :POWer? Query only :MODules? Query only :OTIMe? Query only :SDATe? [:MEASure] Query only :POINt? :DIAGnostic:CLISt:CHECksum:CALculate This command calculates the checksum of the currently selected control list (see Digital Modulation CLISt). Example: :DIAG:CLIS:CHEC:CALC :DIAGnostic:CLISt:CHECksum:DATA? This command displays the checksum calculated before in hexadecimal representation (see above) . Example: :DIAG:CLIS:CHEC:DATA? Response: 1234567 :DIAGnostic:CNMeasure:MODE CN | CARRier | NOISe This command switches on or off the usefull or noise signal for C/N (carrier/noise ratio) measurements. The following modes can be selected: CN carrier and noise signal CARRier carrier signal only NOISe noise signal only Example: :DIAG:CNM:MODE CN *RST value is CN 1125.5555.03 3.40 E-9 SMIQ DIAGnostic System :DIAGnostic:DLISt:CHECksum:CALculate This command calculates the checksum of the currently selected control list (see Digital Modulation DLISt). Example: :DIAG:DLIS:CHEC:CALC :DIAGnostic:DLISt:CHECksum:DATA? This command displays the checksum calculated before in hexadecimal representation (see above). Example: :DIAG:DLIS:CHEC:DATA? Response:1234567 :DIAGnostic:INFO The commands which can be used to query all information which does not require hardware measurement are under this node. :DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt The commands which can be used to query all counters in the instrument are under this node (Cycle COunt). :DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuator 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6? The command queries the number of switching processes of the different attenuator stages. The stages are designated with Z1 to Z6 within the instrument. In this command they are differentiated by a numeric suffix whose name corresponds to the number: Suffix Name Function 1 Z1 40-dB stage 2 Z2 20-dB stage 3 Z3 5-dB stage 4 Z4 20-dB stage 5 Z5 10-dB stage 6 Z6 40-dB stage Example: Response: 1487 :DIAG:INFO:CCO:ATT1? :DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:POWer? The command queries the number of switch-on processes. Example: :DIAG:INFO:CCO:POW? Response: 258 :DIAGnostic:INFO:MODules? The command queries the modules existing in the instrument with their model and state-of-modification numbers. The response supplied is a list in which the different entries are separated by commas. The length of the list is variable and depends on the equipment of the instrument. Each entry consists of three parts which are separated by means of blanks: 1. Name of module; 2. Variant of module in the form VarXX (XX = 2 digits) 3. Revision of module in the form RevXX (XX = 2 digits) Example :DIAG:INFO:MOD? Response: FRO Var01 Rev00, DSYN Var03 Rev12, to... 1125.5555.03 3.41 E-9 DIAGnostic System SMIQ :DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe? The command reads out the internal operating-hours counter. The response supplies the number of hours the instrument has been in operation up to now. Example: :DIAG:INFO:OTIM? Response: 19 :DIAGnostic:INFO:SDATe? The command queries the date of software creation. The response is returned in the form month, day, year. Example: :DIAG:INFO:SDAT? Response: Dec 15 1998 :DIAGnostic:[:MEASure] The commands which trigger a measurement in the instrument and return the measured value are under this node. :DIAGnostic[:MEASure]:POINt? The command triggers a measurement at a measuring point and returns the voltage measured. The measuring point is specified by a numeric suffix (cf. service manual, stock no. 1125.5610.24). Example: :DIAG:MEAS:POIN2? Response: 3.52 1125.5555.03 3.42 E-9 SMIQ DISPLAY System 3.5.9 DISPLAY System This system contains the commands to configure the screen. If system security is activated using command SYSTem:SECurity ON, the display cannot be switched on and off arbitrarily (cf. below) Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :DISPlay :ANNotation [:ALL] ON | OFF :AMPLitude ON | OFF :FREQuency ON | OFF :DISPlay:ANNotation The commands determining whether frequency and amplitude are indicated under this node. Caution: With SYSTem:SECurity ON, the indications cannot be switched from OFF to ON. In this case *RST does not influence the ANNotation settings either. With SYSTem:SECurity OFF, the *RST value is ON for all ANNotation parameters. :DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL] ON | OFF The command switches the frequency and amplitude indication on or off. Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:ALL ON can only be executed if SYSTem:SECurity is set to OFF. Example: With SECurity OFF - *RST value is ON :DISP:ANN:ALL ON :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON | OFF The command switches on or off the amplitude indication. Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON SYSTem:SECurity is set to OFF. Example: :DISP:ANN:AMPL ON can only be executed if With SYSTem:SECurity OFF - *RST value is ON :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF The command switches on or off the frequency indication. Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON can only be executed if SYSTem: SECurity is set to OFF. Example: 1125.5555.03 :DISP:ANN:FREQ ON With SYSTem:SECurity OFF - *RST value is ON 3.43 E-9 FORMat System 3.5.10 SMIQ FORMat System This system contains the commands determining the format of the data the SMIQ returns to the controller. All queries returning a list of numeric data or block data are concerned. With each of these commands, this connection is pointed to in the description. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :FORMat [:DATA] ASCii | PACKed :BORDer NORMal | SWAPped :FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | PACKed The command specifies the data format, that the SMIQ uses for returning the data. When data are transmitted from the controller to the SMIQ, the SMIQ recognizes the data format automatically. In this case, the value specified here has no significance. Note: Settings using the FORMat:DATA command are only effective for commands with which this is stated in the command description. ASCii PACKed Numeric data are transmitted in plain text, separated by commas. Numerical data are transmitted as binary block data. The format of the binary data itself is command-specific. Its description can be found in Section 3.4.5. :FORM:DATA ASC *RST value is ASCii Example: :FORMat:BORDer NORMal | SWAPped This command defines the order of bytes inside a binary block. This concerns only blocks which use the IEEE754 format internally (see section 3.4.5, paragraph "Block Data"). NORMal: The SMIQ expects (for setting commands) and sends (for queries) first the most significant byte of each IEEE-754 floating point number, last the least significant byte. For hosts based on a 80x86 processor this corresponds to the configuration of bytes in the main memory. Thus, no further conversion is required. SWAPped: The SMIQ expects (for setting commands) and sends (for queries) first the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number, last the most significant byte. Example: :FORMat:BORDer:NORMal *RST value is NORMal 1125.5555.03 3.44 E-9 SMIQ 3.5.11 MEMory System MEMory System This system contains the commands for the memory management of the SMIQ. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :MEMory Query only :NSTates? :MEMory:NSTates? The command returns the number of *SAV/*RCL memories available. The SMIQ has 50 *SAV/*RCL memories in total. Example: :MEM:NST? Response: 50 1125.5555.03 3.45 E-9 OUTPut System 3.5.12 SMIQ OUTPut System This system contains the commands specifying the characteristics of the RF output socket and the BLANk socket. The characteristics of the LF socket are specified in the OUTPut2 system. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :OUTPut :AMODe AUTO | FIXed | ELECtronic :AFIXed :RANGe :UPPer? Query only :LOWer? Query only :BLANk :POLarity NORMal | INVerted :IMPedance? Query only :PROTection :CLEar :TRIPped? [:STATe] :PON Query only ON | OFF OFF | UNCHanged :OUTPut:AMODe AUTO | FIXed | ELECtronic The command switches over the operating mode of the attenuator at the RF output (Attenuator MODe). AUTO The attenuator is switched whenever possible. FIXed The attenuator is switched when certain fixed levels are exceeded/fallen below. ELECtronic The level is additionally (without modifying the attenuator) changed via the IQ modulator. Example: :OUTP:AMOD AUTO *RST value is AUTO :OUTPut:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer? This command queries the maximum level which can be set without modifying the attenuator (Attenuator FIXed). Example: :OUTP:AFIX:RANG:UPP? Response: -27 :OUTPut:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer? This command queries the minimum level which can be set without modifying the attenuator (Attenuator FIXed). Example: :OUTP:AFIX:RANG:UPP? Response: -50 1125.5555.03 3.46 E-9 SMIQ OUTPut System :OUTPut:BLANk:POLarity NORMal | INVerted The command sets the polarity of the BLANk signal. NORMal The active BLANk state is indicated by the more positive or higher output voltage. INVers The active BLANk state is indicated by the more negative or lower output voltage. Example: :OUTP:BLAN:POL NORM RST value is NORM :OUTPut:IMPedance? The command queries the impedance of the RF output. This permits converting the output level between units V and W. The impedances cannot be changed. With the SMIQ, this is the fixed value of 50 Ohm for the RF output. Example: :OUTP:IMP? Response: 50 :OUTPut:PROTection The commands to configure the protective circuit are under this node. The RF output is protected by a protective circuit which deactivates the output if an overvoltage is supplied from outside. This does not change the value of OUTPut:STATe. :OUTPut:PROTection:CLEar The command resets the protective circuit after it has been triggered. The state of the output is determined by OUTPut:STATe again. The command triggers an event and hence has no default setting value. Example: :OUTP:PROT:CLE :OUTPut:PROTection:TRIPped? The command queries the state of the protective circuit. The responses mean: "0" The protective circuit has not responded "1" The protective circuit has responded Example: :OUTP:PROT:TRIP? Response: "1" :OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches on or off the RF output. The RF output can also be switched off by the response of the protective circuit. But this has no influence on this parameter. Note: In contrast to the PRESET key, command *RST sets this value to OFF, the output is deactivated. Example: :OUTP:STAT ON *RST value is OFF :OUTPut[:STATe]:PON OFF | UNCHanged This command selects the state the RF output is to assume after power-on of the unit. It only exists for the RF output. *RST does not influence the set value. OFF Output is switched off. UNCHanged Same state as before switch- off Example: :OUTP:PON OFF 1125.5555.03 3.47 E-9 OUTPut2 System 3.5.13 SMIQ OUTPut2 System This system contains the commands specifying the characteristics of the LF output socket. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark :OUTPut2 [:STATe] ON | OFF :VOLTage 0 V to 4 V V :OUTPut2[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches the LF output on or off. Example: :OUTP2:STAT ON :OUTPut2:VOLTage 0V to 4V The command sets the voltage of the LF output. Example: :OUTP2:VOLT 3.0V 1125.5555.03 3.48 *RST value is OFF *RST value is 1 V E-9 SMIQ 3.5.14 SOURce System SOURce System This system contains the commands to configure the RF signal source. Keyword SOURce is optional, i.e., it can be omitted. The LF signal source is configured in the SOURce2 system. The following subsystems are realized in the instrument: Subsystem Settings [:SOURce] :AM Amplitude modulation :CORRection Correction of the output level :DECT Digital standard DECT :DIST Distortion simulation :DM I/Q and digital standard modulations :FM Frequency modulation :FREQuency Frequencies including sweep :FSIM Fading simulator :GSM/EDGE Digital standard GSM/EDGE :IS95 Digital standard IS-95 CDMA :LIST LIST mode :MARKer Marker generation with sweeps :MODulation Switching on/off of all modulations :NADC Digital standard NADC :NOISe Noise generation :PDC Digital standard PDC :PHASe Phase between output signal and reference oscillator signal :PHS Digital standard PHS :PM Phase modulation :POWer Output level, level control and level correction :PULM Pulse modulation :ROSCillator Reference oscillator :SWEep Sweeps :WCDMa Digital standard W-CDMA :W3GPp Digital standard 3GPP W-CDMA 1125.5555.03 3.49 E-9 SOURce:AM Subsystem 3.5.14.1 SMIQ SOURce:AM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the amplitude modulation. Part if the LF-generator settings is effected under SOURce2. Command [:SOURce] :AM :BBANd [:STATe] [:DEPTh] :EXTernal :COUPling :INTernal1|2 :FREQuency :SOURce :STATe Parameter Default Unit ON | OFF 0 to 100 PCT Remark PCT AC | DC Hz 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz EXT | INT | EXT, INT ON | OFF [:SOURce]:AM:BBANd[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches on or off the BB-AM (through the I-input of the IQ-modulator). Example: :SOUR:AM:BBAN:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:AM[:DEPTh] 0 to 100PCT The command sets the modulation depth in percent. Example: :SOUR:AM:DEPT 15PCT [:SOURce]:AM:EXTernal:COUPling AC | DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external AM input. AC The d.c. voltage content is separated from the modulation signal. DC The modulation signal is not altered. Example: :SOUR:AM:EXT:COUP AC *RST value is 30PCT *RST value is AC [:SOURce]:AM:INTernal The settings for the internal AM inputs (LF generator) are effected under this node. Here the same hardware is set for AM, PM, FM and SOURce2. This means that, for example, the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect: :SOUR:FM:INT:FREQ; :SOUR:PM:INT:FREQ; :SOUR2:FREQ:CW [:SOURce]:AM:INTernal1|2:FREQuency The command sets the modulation frequency. Example: :SOUR:AM:INT:FREQ 15kHz 0.1 Hz to 1MHz *RST value is 1 kHz [:SOURce]:AM:SOURce EXT | INT|EXT, INT The command selects the modulation source. INT is the internal LF generator. The external and the internal modulation source can be indicated at the same time (see example). Example: :SOUR:AM:SOUR INT,EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:AM:STATe ON | OFF The command switches amplitude modulation on or off. Example: :SOUR:AM:STAT ON 1125.5555.03 3.50 *RST value is OFF E-9 SMIQ SOURce:CORRection Subsystem 3.5.14.2 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem The CORRection subsystem permits a correction of the output level. The correction is effected by adding user-defined table values to the output level as a function of the RF frequency. In the SMIQ, this subsystem serves to select, transmit and switch on USER-CORRECTION tables (see Chapter 2, Section "User Correction (UCOR)" as well). Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :CORRection ON | OFF [:STATe] :CSET :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... [:SELect] "Name of table" Query only :DATA :FREQuency 300 kHz to RFmax {,300 kHz to RFmax } Hz :POWer -40 dBto 6dB {,-40 dBto 6dB} dB :DELete "Name of table" RFmax depending on model no query [:SOURce]:CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches the table selected using SOURce:CORRection:CSET on or off. Example: *RST value is OFF :SOUR:CORR:STAT ON [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET The commands to select and edit the UCOR tables are under this node. [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? The command requests a list of UCOR tables. The individual lists are separated by means of commas. This command is a query and has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:CORR:CAT? Answer: "UCOR1", "UCOR2", "UCOR3" [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] "Name of table" The command selects a UCOR table. This command alone does not yet effect a correction. First the table selected must be activated (cf. :SOURce:CORRection:STATe). If there is no table of this name, a new table is created. The name may contain up to 7 letters. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:CORR:CSET:SEL "UCOR1" [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DATA The commands to edit the UCOR tables are under this node. 300 kHz to RFmax {,300 kHz to RFmax } (RFmax depending on model) The command transmits the frequency data for the table selected :SOURce:CORRection:CSET. *RST does not influence data lists. [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency Example: 1125.5555.03 using :SOUR:CORR:CSET:DATA:FREQ 100MHz,102MHz,103MHz,to 3.51 E-9 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer -40dB to 6dB {,-40dB to 6dB} The command transmits the level data for the table :SOURce:CORRection:CSET. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: selected using :SOUR:CORR:CSET:DATA:POWer 1dB, 0.8dB, 0.75dB,to [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete "Name of table" The command deletes the table indicated from the instrument memory. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:CORR:CSET:DEL "UCOR2" 1125.5555.03 3.52 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DECT Subsystem 3.5.14.3 SOURce:DECT Subsystem Note #B0 to #BF are characters which are entered in binary form manually. SCPI (and IEEE 488.2) also accept the entry of non-decimal characters in octal and hexadecimal such as #H|h <0 to 9, A|a to F|f>, #Q|q <0 to 7> and #B|b <0|1>. The characters are always output in Hex format after a query. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :DECT ON | OFF :STATe :STANdard :FORMat GFSK | P4DQpsk :FSK :DEViation :SRATe 100Hz to 1.2MHz HZ 2k to 1.2M / 1k to 0.6M Hz (GFSK/P4DQ) Hz range 0.1 to 1 × symbol rate :FILTer :TYPE GAUSs | SCOSine| COSine | USER :SELect ‘name‘ :PARameter 0.2 to 0.7 :SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 :DELay 0 to 65535 :OUTPut[2] SLOT | FRAMe :DELay 0 to 11519 :PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 :CLOCk :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :DELay 0 to 1.0 :PRAMp :PRESet :TIME 0.25 to 16 :DELay -1.0 to +1.0 :SHAPe LINear | COSine :ROFFset -9 to +9 :FOFFset -9 to +9 no query :SLOT :ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB DB :SIMulation :TADJustment -4 to +4 (symbol) :JITTer 0 to 4 (symbol) 1125.5555.03 3.53 E-9 SOURce:DECT Subsystem Command SMIQ Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :DECT :FLISt :PREDefined :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... query only :LOAD ‘name’ no query :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... query only :LOAD ‘name’ no query :STORe ‘name’ no query :DELete ‘name’ no query Þ name {,name}... query only :DLISt :CATalog? :PREamble NORMal | PROLonged :TYPE :SLOT i=0,[1],..23 (Slot Selector) :TYPE FULL | DOUBle | ADATa :LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL :PRESet :STSHift no query (Bit) -9 to +9 :RAMP :CW ON | OFF :DATA #B0 to #B1111111111111 (12 Bit) :PREamble :DATA #B0 to #B11111111111111111 (16 Bit) :PROLonged :DATA :SYNC #B0 to #B11111111111111111... (32 Bit) #B0 to #B11111111111111111 (16 Bit) [:SOURce] :AFIeld :DLISt :BFIeld :DLISt :ZFIeld PN9 | PN11| PN15 | PN 16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa ‘name’ PN9 | PN11| PN15 | PN 16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa ‘name’ ON | OFF’ [:SOURce]:DECT:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the modulation on according to DECT standard. All other standards that might be switched on or digital modulation are automatically switched OFF. Example: :SOUR:DECT:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DECT:STANdard The command sets all modulation parameters to the values of the DECT standard. It does not set the parameters selected with the :DECT:SLOT... commands described in the following. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:DECT:STAN 1125.5555.03 3.54 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DECT Subsystem [:SOURce]:DECT:FORMat GFSK | P4DQpsk The command selects the type of modulation. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FORM P4DQ *RST value is GFSK [:SOURce]:DECT:FSK:DEViation 1kHz to 1.2 MHz The command sets the modulation depth (only for DECT:FORMat GFSK). The range of values depends on the symbol rate (DECT:SRATe × 0.1 to 1). Example: *RST value is 288kHz :SOUR:DECT:FSK:DEV 300.6kHz [:SOURce]:DECT:SRATe 1 kHz to 1.2 MHz The command sets the symbol rate. Permissible values for GFSK are 2 kHz to 1.2 MHz and 1 kHz to 0.6 MHz for P4QPsk. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SRAT 192.1 kHz *RST value is 1152/576kHz (GFSK/P4DQ) [:SOURce]:DECT:FILTer The commands for selecting a filter are under this node. [:SOURce]:DECT:FILTer:TYPE GAUSs | SCOSine | COSine USER The command selects the type of filter; SCOS and COS can be set for P4DQpsk. For DECT:FORMat GFSK, the GAUSs type is set automatically. A filter list should be selected with :DECT:FILT:SEL 'name' for the filter type USER. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FILT:TYPE COS *RST value is GAUS/SCOS (GFSK/P4DQ) [:SOURce]:DECT:FILTer:SELect 'name' The command selects a named filter list. The list is used only if a user-defined filter is selected with :DECT:FILT:TYPE USER. To generate lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SEL, to fill up lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FILT:SEL 'test' *RST value is NONE [:SOURce]:DECT:FILTer:PARameter 0.2 to 0.7 The command sets the filter parameter. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FILT:PAR 0.2 [:SOURce]:DECT:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the sequence. AAUTo ARMED AUTO ARETrigger ARMED RETRIG Example: :SOUR:DECT:SEQ AAUT *RST value is 0. 5 *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:DECT:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering is via IEC/IEEE bus or the Execute command in manual control. Example: :SOUR:DECT:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT 1125.5555.03 3.55 E-9 SOURce:DECT Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DECT:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:DECT:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 65535 The command sets the trigger delay (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:DECT:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:TRIGger:OUTPut[1|2]:DELay 0 to 11519 The command determines the delay of the signal at trigger output 1 or 2 in comparison with the start of the frames/slots in number of symbols. Example: :SOUR:DECT:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 16 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:TRIGger:OUTPut[2]:PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 The command sets the repeat rate (in number of frames) of the signal at trigger output 2. Example: :SOUR:DECT:TRIG:OUTP2:PER 8 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:DECT:CLOCk The commands for setting the data clock are under this node. [:SOURce]:DECT:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the source for the DM data clock. INTernal The internal clock generator is used and output via the clock outputs of the serial and parallel interface. EXTernal The clock is externally fed in via the serial interface and output via the parallel interface. Example: :SOUR:DECT:CLOC:SOUR INT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:DECT:CLOCk:DELay 0 to 1.0 The command sets the delay of the symbol clock (as a fraction of the length of a symbol). Example: :SOUR:DECT:CLOC:DEL 0.75 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:PRAMp The commands for the level control of the burst are under this node. [:SOURce]:DECT:PRAMp:PRESet This command sets the standard-stipulated values for the following commands of level control. It is an event and hence has no query and no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DECT:PRAM:PRES [:SOURce]:DECT:PRAMp:TIME 0.25 to 16.0 The command sets the cutoff steepness (in symbol clocks). Example: :SOUR:DECT:PRAM:TIME 2.5 1125.5555.03 3.56 *RST value is 2 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DECT Subsystem [:SOURce]:DECT:PRAMp:DELay -1.0 to +1.0 The command defines the shift of the envelope characteristic to the modulated signal. A positive value causes a delay of the envelope. Example: :SOUR:DECT:PRAM:DEL 0.2 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:PRAMp:SHAPe LINear | COSine The command selects the linear or cosine shape of the ramp-up and ramp-down (power burst). Example: :SOUR:DECT:PRAM:SHAP LIN *RST value is COS [:SOURce]:DECT:PRAMp:ROFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the (‘R’ising) edge of a power burst to the beginning of the slot. Example: :SOUR:DECT:PRAM:ROFF -3 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:PRAMp:FOFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the ('F'alling) edge of a power burst to the data block. Example: :SOUR:DECT:PRAM:FOFF 4 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB The command determines the amount by which the power of the slots marked by :DECT:SLOT:LEVEL ATT is reduced in comparison with the normal output power (attribute to :LEVEL FULL). Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT:ATT 20 dB *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:SIMulation:TADJustment -4 to +4 (in symbols) This command simulates the timing adjust by extending every 35th frame by the set number of symbols (positive) or by reducing it (negative). 0 is off. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SIM:TADJ 3 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:SIMulation:JITTer 0 to 4 (in symbols) This command simulates the jitter by advancing even frames by the set number of symbols and by delaying uneven frames. 0 is off. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SIM:JITT 2 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:FLISt The commands for storing and reading complete frames including their bursts (slots) are under this node. Predefined and user-generated frames have to be distinguished. [:SOURce]:DECT:FLISt:PREDefined:CATalog? The command returns a list of all predefined frames. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FLIS:PRED:CAT? [:SOURce]:DECT:FLISt:PREDefined:LOAD ‘name’ The command selects one of the predefined (fixed) frames (c.f. Chapter 2). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FLIS:PRED:LOAD ’test’ 1125.5555.03 3.57 E-9 SOURce:DECT Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DECT:FLISt:CATalog? The command returns a list of all user-defined frames. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:DECT:FLISt:LOAD ‘name’ The command loads a user-defined frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FLIS:LOAD ’test’ [:SOURce]:DECT:FLISt:STORe ‘name’ The command stores the current frame under a name. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FLIS:STOR ’test’ [:SOURce]:DECT:FLISt:DELete ‘name’ The command deletes the indicated frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:DECT:FLIS:DEL ’test1’ [:SOURce]:DECT:DLISt:CATalog? The command returns an enumeration of all data lists. These data lists are selected by means of :DECT:SLOT:AFI:DLIS ’name’ and. ...:BFI:DLIS ’name’ and used if :DECT:SLOT:AFI DLISt and...: :BFI DLIS are set. Example: :SOUR:DECT:DLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:DECT:PREamble:TYPE NORMal | PROLonged The command selects the 16-bit (NORMal) or 32-bit (PROLonged) preamble. Example: :SOUR:DECT:PRE PROL PRO *RST value is NORM [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT The commands for setting the slot characteristics are under this node. Since a frame contains 24 slots, suffix ‘i’ is used to select the slot to be changed. i = [1] | 2 to | 22 | 23. Slot 0 to 11 can be used for downlink and slot 12 to 23 for uplink. For double slot even numbers can be entered only since it occupies two full slots. [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:TYPE FULL | DOUBle | ADATa The command selects the type of burst (slot) defined in the standard. ADATa is All Data; the data source set with SLOT:BFIeld is used. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:TYPE ADAT *RST value is FULL [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL The command determines the power stage of the slot. OFF The slot is inactive ATT The power is reduced by the amount defined by :DECT:SLOT:ATT FULL Example: 1125.5555.03 Full power (predefined by level setting). :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:LEV ATT 3.58 *RST value is FULL E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DECT Subsystem [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:PRESet The command sets all the following parameters of the slot to the values defined by the standard as a function of the type set above. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:PRES [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:STSHift -9 to +9 (in bit) This command allows a timing shift of the indicated slot by the set number of bits to simulate a wrong timing (positive = delay; negative = advance). Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:STSH -3 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:RAMP:CW ON | OFF The command activates or deactivates the generation of unmodulated (CW) signal during the ramp time. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:PRAM:CW ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:RAMP:DATA #B0 to #B111 to (12bit) The command sets the data used during the ramp time. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:PRAM:DATA #B111100001111 *RST value is 101010101010 / 010101010101 (downl./uplink) [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:PREamble:DATA #B0 to #B111 to (16bit) The command sets the data used for the 16-bit long preamble. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:PRE:DATA #B1111000011110000 *RST value is 1010101010101010 / 0101010101010101 (downlink/uplink) [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:PREamble:PROLonged:DATA #B0 to #B111 to (32bit) The command sets the data used for the 32-bit long preamble. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:PRE:PROL:DATA #B1111 *RST value 10101010101010101010101010101010 (downlink) *RST value 01010101010101010101010101010101 (uplink) [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT:SYNC #B0 to #B111 to (16bit) The command sets the data used for synchronization. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:SYNC #B0000111100001111 RST value is 1110100110001010 / 0001011001110101 (downl./uplink) [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT[:SOURce]:AFIeld PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command defines the data source for the A field. It is either a PRBS generator (of different sequence length), a data list or the serial interface. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT3:AFI PN15 *RST value is PN9 [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT[:SOURce]:AFIeld:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list is used only if lists have been set as data source using the command :DECT:SLOT:AFI DLIS. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: 1125.5555.03 :DECT:SLOT:AFI:DLIS ’test’ 3.59 E-9 SOURce:DECT Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT[:SOURce]:BFIeld PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the B field. The data source set by means of this command is also used for SLOT:TYPE ADATa. It is either a PRBS generator (of different sequence length), a data list or the serial interface. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT3:BFI PN15 *RST value is PN9 [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT[:SOURce]:BFIeld:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list is used only if lists have been set as data source using the command :DECT:SLOT:BFI DLIS. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :DECT:SLOT:BFI:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:DECT:SLOT[:SOURce]:ZFIeld ON | OFF The command activates/deactivates the repetition of the content of the X field. Example: :SOUR:DECT:SLOT2:ZFI ON 1125.5555.03 3.60 *RST value is ON E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DIST Subsystem 3.5.14.4 SOURce:DIST Subsystem Subsystem DISTortion comprises all commands for setting the distortion simulator. The NDSim subsystem under CALibrate is available for the offset calibration. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :DISTortion Not-SCPI [:STATe] ON | OFF :MODE POLYnomial | DATA :DATA :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... :SELect 'name of characteristic' :DELete 'name of characteristic' Query only :ALL :AM -100 dB to 0 dB {, -100 dB to 0 dB } | block data dB :FREE? Query only :POINts? :AMBase Query only -100 dB to 0 dB {, -100 dB to 0 dB } | block data - :POINts? :PM Query only -180 degrees to +180 degrees {, -180 degrees to +180 degrees} | block data dB :FREE? Query only :POINts? :PMBase Query only -100 dB to 0 dB {, -100 dB to 0 dB } | block data - :POINts? Query only :LEVel :CORRection -20.0 to 6.00 dB :POLYnomial Not-SCPI :AMAM :K -10 dB to +10 dB dB :AMPM :K :IFUNction -60 deg to +60 deg ON | OFF :LEVel :CORRection -20 dB to +6 dB dB :RECalculate [:SOURce]:DISTortion[:STATe] ON | OFF This command switches the distortion function on or off. Example: :SOUR:DIST ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DISTortion:MODE POLYnomial | DATA Distortion data are calculated either by a list (:DIST:DATA... commands) or from the coefficients of a polynomial (:DIST:POLY... commands). Example: :SOUR:DIST POLY *RST value is DATA [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA The commands for the characteristics are under this node. 1125.5555.03 3.61 E-9 SOURce:DIST Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:CATalog? This command outputs a list with the names of all characteristics stored in the unit separated by commas. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:CAT? Answer e.g.: TWTA, USER, .... [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:SELect ' ' This command selects the characteristic (data list) all other SOURCE:DIST:DATA:... commands refer to. If a new characteristic is to be generated, the name (max. 8 characters) can be entered here. A new characteristic is then created under this name. Up to 10 characteristics can be created. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:SEL "TWTA" [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:DELete ' ' This command deletes the indicated characteristic. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:DEL "TEST1" [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:DELete:ALL This command deletes all characteristics. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:DEL:ALL [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:AM -100 dB to 0 dB {, -100 dB to 0 dB } | block data This command fills the output values (y-axis) for the AM/AM conversion of the selected characteristic with data. The data can be transmitted as a list of any length separated by commas or as a binary block. If they are transmitted as block data, 8 (4) bytes are interpreted as floatingpoint value with double accuracy; settable with command FORMAT:DATA. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:AM -12.6,-7.8,-5.2,-4.4,-3.6,-3,-2.4,... [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:AM:FREE? This command outputs two values. One indicates the remaining storage capacity for new AM/AM characteristics and the other provides information about the space which is already occupied. All indications refer to the number of elements. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:AM:FREE? Answer e.g.: 30,0 [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:AM:POINts? The command provides the length of the output-value list (y-axis) of AM/AM conversion in elements. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:AM:POINts? Answer e.g.: 0 [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:AMBase -100 dB to 0 dB {, -100 dB to 0 dB } | block data This command fills the input values (x-axis) for the AM/AM conversion of the selected characteristic with data. The data can be transmitted as a list of any length separated by commas or as a binary block. If they are transmitted as block data, 8 (4) bytes are interpreted as floating-point value with double accuracy; settable with FORM:DATA. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: 1125.5555.03 :SOUR:DIST:DATA:AMB -23.5,-18.5,-15.5,-14.5,-13.5,... 3.62 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DIST Subsystem [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:AMBase:POINts? This command provides the length of the input-value list (x-axis) of AM/AM conversion in elements. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:AMB:POINts? Answer e.g.: 0 [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:PM -180 degrees to +180 degrees {, -180 degrees to +180 degrees } | block data This command fills the output values (y-axis) for the AM/PM conversion of the selected characteristic with data. The data can be transmitted as a list of any length separated by commas or as a binary block. If they are transmitted as block data, 8 (4) bytes are interpreted as floatingpoint value with double accuracy; settable with command FORMAT:DATA. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:PM 0,-1.2,-3.8,-9.5,-15.9,-23,-30.4,-43.4 [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:PM:FREE? This command outputs two values. One indicates the remaining storage capacity for new AM/PM characteristics and the other provides information about the space which is already occupied. All indications refer to the number of elements. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:PM:FREE? Answer e.g.: 30, 0 [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:PM:POINts? The command provides the length of the output-value list (y-axis) of AM/PM conversion in elements. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:PM:POINts?" Answer e.g.: 0 [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:PMBase -100 dB to 0 dB {, -100 dB to 0 dB } | block data This command fills the input values (x-axis) for the AM/PM conversion of the selected characteristic with data. The data can be transmitted as a list of any length separated by commas or as a binary block. If they are transmitted as block data, 8 bytes are interpreted as floating-point value; settable with command FORMAT:DATA. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:PMB -23.5,-18.5,-15.5,-12.5,-9.5,-6.5,... [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:PMBase:POINts? The command provides the length of the input-value list (x-axis) of AM/PM conversion in elements. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:PMB:POINts?" Answer e.g.: 0 [:SOURce]:DISTortion:DATA:LEVel:CORRection -20 to +6.00 dB This command serves for setting the level correction for a particular characteristic. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:LEV:CORR -3.12 dB *RST value is 0 dB [:SOURce]:DISTortion:POLYnomial:AMAM:K -10 dB to +10 dB The command sets the coefficients k2 to k5 for the AM-AM distortion. Example: :SOUR:DIST:POLY:AMAM:K3 3.4 dB 1125.5555.03 3.63 *RST value is 0 dB E-9 SOURce:DIST Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DISTortion:POLYnomial:AMPM:K -60 deg to +60 deg The command sets the coefficients k2 to k5 for the AM-PM distortion. Example: :SOUR:DIST:POLY:AMPM:K4 12.8 deg *RST value is 0 deg [:SOURce]:DISTortion:POLYnomial:IFUNction ON | OFF The command switches on and off the inversion of the distortion characteristic to compensate an amplifier connected after the SMIQ. Example: :SOUR:DIST:POLY:IFUN ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DISTortion:POLYnomial:LEVel:CORRection -20 dB to +6 dB The command sets the level correction for the distortion characteristic from the polynomial coefficients. Example: :SOUR:DIST:DATA:LEV:CORR -3.12 DB *RST value is 0 dB [:SOURce]:DISTortion:RECalculate The distortion data transmitted to the unit via IEC/IEEE bus are loaded in the module and become active. This command triggers an action and therefore has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:DIST:REC 1125.5555.03 3.64 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DM Subsystem 3.5.14.5 SOURce:DM Subsystem In this subsystem, the types of digital standard modulation as well as vector modulation (I/Q modulation) are checked. Vector Modulation Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :DM :IQ :STATe ON | OFF :CREStfactor 0 to 30 :PRAMp OFF | AEXTernal dB :IMPairment [:STATe] ON | OFF Only with option SMIQB47 :FILTer :STATe ON | OFF :FREQuency 850 kHz | 2.5 MHz | 5 MHz, 7.5MHz :TRANsition NORMal | FAST PCT :LEAKage [:MAGNitude] 0 to 50.0 PCT DEG :QUADrature :ANGLe -10.0 to 10.0 DEG PCT :IQRatio [:MAGNitude] Hz -12.0 to 12.0 PCT :IQSWap [:STATe] ON | OFF [:SOURce]:DM:IQ:STATe ON | OFF This command switches vector modulation (I/Q modulation) on or off. Example: :SOUR:DM:IQ:STAT ON [:SOURce]:DM:IQ:CREStfactor 0 to 30 dB This command sets the crest factor with vector modulation. Example: :SOUR:DM:IQ:CRES 10 *RST value: OFF *RST value: 0 [:SOURce]:DM:IQ:PRAMp OFF | AEXTernal This command switches the level control via the input socket (analog external). Example: :SOUR:DM:IQ:PRAM AEXT *RST value: OFF [:SOURce]:DM:IQ:IMPairment[:STATe] ON | OFF This command activates (ON) or deactivates (OFF) the three tuning or correction values LEAKage, QUADrature and IQRatio for I/Q modulation. Example: :SOUR:DM:IQ:IMP OFF *RST value: OFF 1125.5555.03 3.65 E-9 SOURce:DM Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DM:IQ:FILTer The commands for the IQ filter settings are under this node. [:SOURce]:DM:IQ:FILTer:STATe ON | OFF This command switches the IQ filter ON or OFF. It is only available with option SMIQB47 - LOW ACP Filter. Example: :SOUR:DM:IQ:FILT:STAT ON *RST value: OFF [:SOURce]:DM:IQ:FILTer:FREQuency 850 kHz, 2.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 7.5 MHz This command selects an IQ filter with the limit frequencies 850 kHz, 2.5 MHz, or 5 MHz or 7.5 MHz. It is only available with option SMIQB47 - LOW ACP Filter. Example: :SOUR:DM:IQ:FILT:FREQ 2.5MHZ *RST value is 2.5 MHz [:SOURce]:DM:IQ:TRANsition NORMal | FAST The command switches over the setting time for the IQ filter. FAST should only be used if a fast switchover between CW and I/Q modulation is required. Example: *RST value is NORM :SOUR:DM:IQ:TRAN FAST [:SOURce]:DM:LEAKage[:MAGNitude] 0 to 50.0 PCT This command adjusts the residual carrier amplitude for I/Q modulation. Example: :SOUR:DM:LEAK 3PCT *RST value: 0 [:SOURce]:DM:QUADrature:ANGLe -10.0 to 10.0 degree This command changes the quadrature offset for I/Q modulation. Example: :SOUR:DM:QUAD:ANGL -5DEG *RST value: 0 [:SOURce]:DM:IQRatio[:MAGNitude] -12.0 to 12.0 PCT This command adjusts the ratio of I and Q modulation (gain imbalance). Example: :SOUR:DM:IQR 4PCT *RST value: 0 [:SOURce]:DM:IQSWap[:STATe] ON | OFF This command interchanges the I and Q channels in position ON. Example: :SOUR:DM:IQSW OFF 1125.5555.03 3.66 *RST value: OFF E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DM Subsystem Digital Modulation Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :DM :STATe ON | OFF :SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger | SINGle :SOURce PRBS | PATTern | DLISt | SERial | PARallel | SDATa :PATTern ZERO | ONE | ALTernate :PRBS [:LENGth] 9 | 15 | 16 | 20 | 21 | 23 :DLISt :DATA 0 | 1 {,0 | 1 } or block data :DATA? [ [, ]] query 0 < 1 {,0 | 1} or block data no query :APPend query only :CATalog? :SELect ‘name’ :DELete ‘name’ no query :COPY ‘name’ no query query only :FREE? :POINts :CLISt :CONTrol [:STATe] :DATA ON | OFF {, }... query only :CATalog? :SELect ‘name’ :DELete ‘name’ no query :COPY ‘name’ no query :FREE? query only :POINts? query only :MLISt :DATA A,B,C,D,E,F, I1, Q1, I2, Q2... query only :CATalog? :SELect ‘name’ :DELete ‘name’ no query :FREE? query only :POINts? query only :FLISt :DATA A,B,C,D, I1, Q1, I2, Q2... query only :CATalog? :SELect ‘name’ :DELete ‘name’ no query query only :FREE? query only :POINts? :STANdard 1125.5555.03 APCFm | APCQpsk | ASK | BLUetooth | CDPD | CT2 | DECT | GSM | GSMEdge | IRIDium | FIS95 | RIS95 | NADC | PDC | PHS | TETRa | TFTS | PWT | QWCDma | ICOBpsk | ICOGmsk | ICOQpsk | WORLdspace | AT55 3.67 QWCDma only with option B47 WORLdspace with option B17 E-9 SOURce:DM Subsystem Command SMIQ Default unit Parameter Remark [:SOURce] :DM :FORMat GMSK | GFSK | BPSK | QPSK | QIS95 | QICO | QWCDma | QINMarsat | OQPSk | OIS95 | P4QPsk | P4DQpsk | PSK8 | PSKE8 | QAM16 to 256 | ASK | FSK2 | FSK4 | AFSK4 | USER QWCDma only with option SMIQB47 Query only :MDELay? :ASK :DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT 100 Hz to 2.5 MHz Hz 1 kHz to 7 MHz Hz :FSK :DEViation :SRATe :FILTer :TYPE SCOSine | COSine | GAUSs | LGAUss | BESS1 | BESS2 | IS95 | EIS95 | APCO | TETRa | WCDMa | RECTangle | SPHase | USER :PARameter 0.1 to 1.0 :MODE LACP | LEVM :CODing OFF| GSM| NADC| PDC| PHS| TETRa| PWT| TFTS| DIFF| DGRay| DPHS| APCO25| INMarsat| VDL :CLOCk :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal | COUPled :MODE BIT | SYMBol :DELay 0 to 1.0 :POLarity NORMal | INVerted :LDIStortion [:STATe] ON | OFF :PRAMp [:STATe] ON | OFF :SOURce CLISt | AEXTernal | DEXTernal :TIME 0.25 to 32 :DELay -1.0 to 5.0 :SHAPe LINear | COSine :ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB dB :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :INHibit :DELay :SLOPe :THReshold 0 to 67.1E6 0 to 65535 POSitive | NEGative [:ALL] :INPut :IMPedance -2,5 to +2,5 V 1125.5555.03 V G1K | G50 | ECL 3.68 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DM Subsystem [:SOURce]:DM:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the digital (user-defined, not stipulated by a standard) modulation on or off. Example: :SOUR:DM:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DM:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger | SINGle This command selects the trigger mode: AUTO The sequence is repeated cyclically. RETRigger The sequence is repeated cyclically. After the start, the sequence is restarted with each new trigger even before it is completed. AAUTo ARMED AUTO. The sequence waits for a trigger signal. After the start, the trigger mode is AUTO and the sequence cannot be triggered anymore. ARETrigger ARMED RETRIGGER. The sequence waits for a trigger signal. After the start, the sequence is restarted with each new trigger even before it is completed. SINGle After a trigger event, the sequence is only run once. Example :SOUR:DM:SEQ:AAUT *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:DM:SOURce PRBS | PATTern | DLISt | SERial | PARallel | SDATa The command selects the data source. PRBS internally generated pseudo random bit sequences. PATT internally generated (fixed) data pattern. DLISt internal data generator (only with DGEN). SERial external serial interface. PARallel external parallel interface. SDATa asynchronous serial data input SER DATA. Example: :SOUR:DM:SOUR SER *RST value is PRBS [:SOURce]:DM:PATTern ZERO | ONE | ALTernate The command selects the data pattern. The data range is alternately assigned with 0 and 1 by means of ALTernate. Example: :SOUR:DM:PATT ALT *RST value is ZERO [:SOURce]:DM:PRBS[:LENGth] 9 | 15 | 16 | 20 | 21 | 23. The command determines the length of the pseudo random sequence according to the following equation: Length = (2^LENGth) - 1 Example: :SOUR:DM:PRBS 21 *RST value is 15 [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt The commands for the data are under this node. Data lists are not affected by *RST. [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt:DATA 0 | 1 {,0 | 1 }... This command transmits the bit data to the selected data list which is thus overwritten. The data can also be transmitted as block data in binary or PACKed format (see section: Parameter, Block Data). Each byte will then be interpreted as made up of 8 data bits. Here, the command :SYST:COMM:GPIB:LTER EOI should be used to set the delimiter mode to 'circuit message EOI only' so that an accidental LF within the data sequence is not first identified as a delimiter and thus momentarily interrupts the data transmission. The command ...LTER STAN resets the delimiter mode. The data are not modified by *RST. Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:DATA 0,1,1,0,0,0,0,1,0,1,0,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,1,0,1,1,0,1 :SOUR:DM:DLIS:DATA #13aX- 1125.5555.03 3.69 E-9 SOURce:DM Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt:DATA? [ [, ]] The command reads out the data list. If the query is enhanced by the two parameters start and length, the list will be read out in smaller parts. Start and length are given in bits. Without parameters the whole length will always be output from address 1. The data format is selected by means of the :FORMat ASCii | PACKed command. The order of the bytes is stipulated in the IEC/IEEE-bus standard (MSbyte first). Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:DATA? 2048,1024 [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt:DATA:APPend 0 | 1 {,0 | 1 }... The command allows the data lists, which can be very long (up to 20 Mbits = 2.5 Mbyte), to be transmitted in smaller parts. They are added to the end of already existing data. First, the data list values have to be overwritten using the above DM:DLIS:DATA command. Further data can then be added using the DM:DLIS:DATA:APP commands. The data format is the same for the two commands. Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:DATA:APP 0,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,1,0,1,1,0,1,0,0 :SOUR:DM:DLIS:DATA:APP #12aX [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt:CATalog? The command returns a list of data list names separated by commas. Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt:SELect ‘ ‘ The command selects the indicated data list. This list will only take effect as data source with mode :DM:SOURce DLISt selected. The list can only be filled with values if it has been selected beforehand. If the indicated list does not exist, it will be generated. has to be put in brackets (< >) and may have up to 8 characters. Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:SEL ’test’ [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt:DELete ‘ ‘ This command deletes the data list indicated by . The name has to be put in brackets (<>) and may have up to 8 alphanumeric characters. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:DEL ’test1’ [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt:COPY ‘ ‘ The command copies the selected list to the data list indicated by . This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:COPY ’test1’ [:SOURce]:DM:DLISt:FREE? This command returns the available free space for digital data (in bits) and the length of the selected list. The 2 values are separated by a comma. Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:FREE? :SOURce]:DM:DLISt:POINts The command indicates the number of elements (in bits) of the currently selected data list. Since only multiples of 8 bits can be transmitted when using block data, the exact number of used bits can be set here. Overflow bits in the list are ignored. Example: :SOUR:DM:DLIS:POIN 234 1125.5555.03 3.70 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DM Subsystem [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt The commands for processing the control list are under this node. The control list contains the switching signals for the burst, the level, the modulation etc. The list index is with reference to the symbols in the data list and the list only contains the status changes. Control lists are not affected by *RST. [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt:CONTrol[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches control on or off using the control list. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLIS:CONT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt:DATA {, }... The command transmits the bit data to the selected control list which is then overwritten. struc>=: , , , , , , =: numeric value: 1 to 2^26 ( 67108864) =: numeric value: 0 | 1 The data can also be transmitted as a binary block with being a 4 byte value in which the 26 LSBs represent the symbol index and the remaining 6 bits the binary values (see also section parameter, block data). Each byte is interpreted as made up of 8 data bits. Here, the command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator EOI should be used to set the delimiter mode to 'circuit message EOI only' so that an accidental LF within the data sequence is not first identified as a delimiter and thus momentarily interrupts the data transmission. The command ...LTER STANdard resets the delimiter mode. For the query, switchover between the two formats given above is possible by means of the :FORMat ASCii | PACKed command. The order of bytes is stipulated in the IEC/IEEE-bus standard (MSByte first). It should be noted that in the binary form the symbol index starts with 0. In the binary format this means that each symbol index is less by 1 than actually indicated on the screen and input/output via IEC/IEEE-bus in the ASCII format. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLIS:DATA 12345678,0,1,1,0,0,0,23456789,1,0,0,1,0,0 :SOUR:DM:CLIS:DATA #18aX-’y$?s The first two positions of the list are filled with the examples (with different values). [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt:CATalog? The command returns a list of data list names separated by commas. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt:SELect ‘ ‘ The command selects the indicated control list. This list only becomes effective as control list if the:DM:PRAMp:SOURce CLISt mode has been selected. The list can only be filled with values if it has been selected beforehand. If the indicated list does not exist, it will be generated. has to be put in brackets (< >) and may have up to 8 characters. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLIS:SEL ’TEST2’ [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt:DELete ‘ ‘ The command deletes the control list indicated by . This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query Example: :SOUR:DM:CLIS:DEL ’TEST2’ 1125.5555.03 3.71 E-9 SOURce:DM Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt:COPY ‘ ‘ The command copies the selected list to the data list indicated by . This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLIS:COPY ’TEST2’ [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt:FREE? This command returns the available free space for the control data (lines consisting of 4 bytes) in elements. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLIS:FREE? [:SOURce]:DM:CLISt:POINts? The command returns the number of elements (lines consisting of 4 bytes) of the currently selected list. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLIS:POIN? [:SOURce]:DM:MLISt:DATA A,B.C,D,E,F,I1,Q1,I2,Q2... The command transmits the mapping data to the selected list which is therefore overwritten. The command can be used only if a list has been selected beforehand (compare with DM:MLISt:SELect ). A: 1 for PSK modulation 2 for QAM modulation 3 for FSK modulation 4 for PSK modulation with coding 5 for QAM modulation with coding 6 for FSK modulation with coding B: 1 to 8, with B = log2 m (mapping states) C: 0 if no delay is to be used in the Q-path 1 if the Q-path is to be delayed by Tsymbol/2 (e.g. for offset QPSK) D: 0, reserved E: 0, reserved F: 0, reserved I,Q: Floating point values for I and Q; m values for I and Q must be defined for PSK and QAM modulation. For FSK all Q-values must be set to 0. The values have to be entered in ascending order starting with the least significant data symbol. Example (for QPSK with m = 4, user mapping without coding): :SOUR:DM:MLIS:DATA 1,2,0,0,0,0,0.7,0.7,0.7,-0.7,-0.7,0.7,-0.7,-0.7 The example results in the following IQ mapping Q 10 00 I 11 01 QPSK (MSB, LSB) If data A is of value 4 to 6, a coding is activated. A variable number of values are added which are automatically set by application program UserMod1. The generation and transmission of a user mapping with or without coding can be performed by means of this program. 1 Can be downloaded from Internet site http://www.rohde-schwarz.com. 1125.5555.03 3.72 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DM Subsystem [:SOURce]:DM:MLISt:CATalog? The command returns a list of mapping list names separated by commas. Example: :SOUR:DM:MLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:DM:MLISt:SELect ‘ ‘ The command selects the indicated user-defined mapping list. This list only becomes effective as modulation if the:DM:FORMat USER mode has been selected. The list can only be filled with values if it has been selected beforehand. If the indicated list does not exist, it will be generated. has to be put in brackets (< >) and may have up to 8 characters. Example: :SOUR:DM:MLIS:SEL ’test’ [:SOURce]:DM:MLISt:DELete ‘ The command deletes the mapping list indicated by . This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query Example: :SOUR:DM:MLIS:DEL ’TEST2’ [:SOURce]:DM:MLISt:FREE? This command returns the available free space for the mapping data (lines consisting of 4 bytes) in elements. Example: :SOUR:DM:MLIS:FREE? [:SOURce]:DM:MLISt:POINts? The command returns the number of elements (numbers) of the currently selected list. Example: :SOUR:DM:MLIS:POIN? [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA A,B,C,D,I1,Q1,I2,Q2.. The command transfers filter data to the selected list which is overwritten. The command can only be used if a list has been selected before (see :DM:FLISt:SEL). A: B: C: D: I,Q: Pulse length: 8, 16 Oversampling: 2 to 32, number of coefficients x = pulse length * oversampling <= 256. 6 dB bandwidth 70 dB bandwidth Coefficients for i and q with PSK/QAM or for f with FSK. The coefficients are not used for q with FSK. A user filter can be loaded and transferred by means of application program UserMod. [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:CATalog? The command returns a catalog of all available filter lists separated by comma. Example: :SOUR:DM:FLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SELect ‘ ‘ The command selects the given user-defined filter list. This list is effective as a filter only if :DM:FILTer:TYPE USER mode is selected. Before the list can be filled up with values, it must be selected. If the indicated list does not exist, it will be generated. should be put into brackets and have a maximum length of 7 characters. Example: :SOUR:DM:FLIS:SEL ’test’ 1125.5555.03 3.73 E-9 SOURce:DM Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DELete ‘ The command deletes the filter list specified by . This command triggers an event and hence has neither *RST value nor query. Example: :SOUR:DM:FLIS:DEL ’TEST2’ [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:FREE? The command returns the free space available for filter data as a numeral. Example: :SOUR:DM:FLIS:FREE? [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:POINts? The command returns the number of values of the currently selected list. Example: :SOUR:DM:FLIS:POIN? [:SOURce]:DM:STANdard APCFm | APCQpsk | ASK | BLUetooth | CDPD | CT2 | DECT | GSM | GSMEdge | IRIDium | FIS95 | RIS95 | NADC | PDC | PHS | TETRa | TFTS | PWT | ICOBpsk | ICOGmsk | ICOQpsk | WORLdspace | QWCDma | AT55 The command adjusts the modulation parameters MODULATION, SYMBOL RATE, FILTER and CODING to the selected standard. The default setting is USER. This setting is always activated automatically if one of the modulation parameters is changed and does not correspond to the selected standard. QWCDma is only available with option SMIQB47. WORLDspace only with option SMIQB17. APCFm APCQpsk Example: APCO4FM APCOQPSK :SOUR:DM:STAN PHS *RST value USER [:SOURce]:DM:FORMat BPSK | GFSK | GMSK | QPSK | QIS95 | QINMarsat | QICO | QWCDma | OQPSk | OIS95 | P4QPsk | P4DQpsk | PSK8 | PSKE8 | ASK | FSK2 | FSK4 | AFSK4 | QAM16 | QAM32 | QAM64 | QAM256 | USER The command selects the modulation. QWCDma is only available with option SMIQB47. P4DQpsk PSK2 PSK4 QIS95 OIS95 QWCDma AFSK4 USER Example: π/4DQSPK is an alias for BPSK is alias for QPSK (according to SCPI). QPSK IS95 OQPSK IS95 WCDMA QPSK 4FSK APCO The list selected with DM:MLIS:SEL... and defined via DM:MLIS:DATA... is used. :SOUR:DM:FORM GMSK *RST value is P4DQpsk [:SOURce]:DM:MDELay? Value for time delay of digital modulation between data input/output and RF output of the SMIQ. Example: :SOUR:DM:MDEL? [:SOURce]:DM:ASK:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT The commands sets the input value for the ASK modulation depth. Example: :SOUR:DM:ASK:DEPT 10 1125.5555.03 3.74 *RST value is 100 PCT E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DM Subsystem [:SOURce]:DM:FSK:DEViation 100 kHz to 2.5 MHz The command sets the deviation for FSK (only for DM:FORmat FSK2, FSK4 and GFSK). Example: *RST value is 4.5 kHz :SOUR:DM:FSK:DEV 9 kHz [:SOURce]:DM:SRATe 1kHz to 7 MHz The command sets the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:DM:SRAT 200 kHz *RST value is 24.3 kHz [:SOURce]:DM:FILTer The filter selection commands are under this node. [:SOURce]:DM:FILTer:TYPE SCOSine | COSine | GAUSs | LGAuss | BESS1 | BESS2 | IS95 | EIS95 | APCO | TETRa | WCDMa | RECTangle | SPHase | USER The command selects the type of filter. BESS1 BESS2 EIS95 APCO USER Example: BESSEL B*T 1.25 BESSEL B*T 2.50 IS-95+EQUALIZER filter according to standard APCO modulation C4FM The filter list selected with DM:FLIS:SEL... and defined via DM:FLIS:DATA... is used. :SOUR:DM:FILT:TYPE GAUS *RST value is SCOS [:SOURce]:DM:FILTer:PARameter 0.1 to 1.0 The command sets the filter parameter (Roff Off or BxT rate). Example: :SOUR:DM:FILT:PAR 1 [:SOURce]:DM:FILTer:MODE LACP | LEVM The command selects the filter mode. Example: :SOUR:DM:FILT:MODE LEVM *RST value is 0.35 *RST value is LACP [:SOURce]:DM:CODing OFF | GSM | NADC | PDC | PHS | TETRa | TFTS | PWT | INMarsat | DIFF | DPHS | DGRay | APCO25 | VDL The command selects the modulation coding (standard) . DPHS PHASE DIFF DGRay DIFF + DGRAY Example: :SOUR:DM:COD NADC *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DM:CLOCk The commands for setting the data clock are under this node. [:SOURce]:DM:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal | COUPled The command selects the source for the clock of the digital modulation. INTernal The internal clock generator is used. EXTernal The clock is fed externally. COUPled The clock comes from the same source as the data. Selection is determined by :DM:SOURce. Example: 1125.5555.03 *RST value is COUPled :SOUR:DM:CLOC:SOUR INT 3.75 E-9 SOURce:DM Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:DM:CLOCk:MODE BIT | SYMBol The command selects the clock mode for :DM:CLOCk:SOURce EXTernal BIT Only the input D_CLOCK is used. SYMBol Only the input S_CLOCK is used. The bit and symbol clock only differ for modulations with more than two states, i.e. modulations for which more than one bit is required to code each state. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLOC:MODE BIT *RST value is SYMBol [:SOURce]:DM:CLOCk:DELay 0 to 1.0 The command sets the delay of the symbol clock. Example: :SOUR:DM:CLOC:DEL 0.2 [:SOURce]:DM:CLOCk:POLarity NORMal | INVerted The command selects the active slope for the clock. NORMal SLOPE POS. INVert SLOPE NEG Example: :SOUR:DM:CLOC:POL INV [:SOURce]:DM:LDIStortion[:STATe] ON | OFF The command sets the reduced level for the low-distortion mode. Example: :SOUR:DM:LDIS ON *RST value is 0 *RST value is NORMal *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DM:PRAMp The commands for the level control of the burst are under this node. [:SOURce]:DM:PRAMp[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches the level control on or off. Example: :SOUR:DM:PRAM ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:DM:PRAMp:SOURce CLISt | AEXTernal | DEXTernal The command selects the level control. CLISt The control list defined under :DM:CLISt controls the level (INT). AEXT DEXT Example: Analog signal at the burst control input controls the level. Digital signals BURSt-GATE and LEV-ATT control the level. :SOUR:DM:PRAM:SOUR DEXT [:SOURce]:DM:PRAMp:TIME 0.25 to 32 The command sets the steep cutoff (as multiple of symbol length). Example: :SOUR:DM:PRAM:TIME 2.5 *RST value is CLISt *RST value is 3.0 [:SOURce]:DM:PRAMp:DELay -1.0 to +5.0 The command defines the shift of the envelope characteristic to the modulated signal. A positive value causes a delay of the envelope. Example: :SOUR:DM:PRAM:DEL 0.2 *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.76 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:DM Subsystem [:SOURce]:DM:PRAMp:SHAPe LINear | COSine The command selects the linear or cosine-square shape of the ramp-up and ramp-down (power burst). Example: :SOUR:DM:PRAM:SHAP COS *RST value is COS [:SOURce]:DM:PRAMp:ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB The command sets the level reduction value. Example: :SOUR:DM:PRAM:ATT 12 dB *RST value is 0 dB [:SOURce]:DM:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. EXT Triggering via external trigger input. INT Triggering via IEC/IEEE bus or the Execute command of manual control. Example: :SOUR:DM:TRIG: EXT *RST value is INTernal [:SOURce]:DM:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration in number of symbols. Example: :SOUR:DM:TRIG:INH 12000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DM:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 65535 The command sets the trigger delay in number of symbols. Example: :SOUR:DM:TRIG:DEL 10 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:DM:TRIGger:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative The command selects the active slope of the external trigger signal. Example: :SOUR:DM:TRIG:SLOP NEG *RST value is POSitive. [:SOURce]:DM:THReshold[:ALL] -2.5 to +2.5V The command sets the voltage threshold of the digital data and clock inputs. Example: :SOUR:DM:THR 1 V *RST value is 1.0 V [:SOURce]:DM:INPut:IMPedance G1K | G50 | ECL The command sets the impedance of all the data and clock inputs: G1K 1 kOhm to ground G50 50 Ohm to ground ECL ECL-compatible input (only with option SMIQB10, not with option SMIQB20) Example: :SOUR:DM:INP:IMP G50 *RST value is G1K 1125.5555.03 3.77 E-9 SOURce:FM Subsystem 3.5.14.6 SMIQ SOURce:FM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the frequency modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal. The SMIQ can be equipped with two independent frequency modulators (option SM-B5). They are differentiated by a suffix after FM. SOURce:FM1 SOURce:FM2 Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] Option SM-B5 :FM1|2 Hz 0 to 1MHz [:DEViation] :EXTernal1|2 :COUPling AC | DC :INTernal :FREQuency Hz 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz :PREemphasis 0 | 50us | 75us :SOURce INT | EXT1 | EXT2 :STATe ON | OFF [:SOURce]:FM1|2[:DEViation] 0 to 1 MHz The command specifies the frequency variation caused by the FM. Although the LF generator is used as modulation sources, the frequency variation is independent of the voltage at the LF output. The maximally possible DEViation depends on SOURce:FREQuency (cf. data sheet). Example: *RST value is 10 kHz :SOUR:FM1:DEV 5kHz [:SOURce]:FM1|2:EXTernal1|2 The commands to set the external FM input are under this node. The settings under EXTernal for modulations AM, FM and PM are independent of each other. The settings are always related to the socket which is determined by the numeric suffix after EXTernal. The suffix after FM is ignored then. With the following commands, e.g., the settings are both related to EXT2 input: :SOUR:FM1:EXT2:COUP AC :SOUR:FM2:EXT2:COUP AC A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1. [:SOURce]:FM1|2:EXTernal1|2:COUPling AC | DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external FM input. AC The d.c. voltage content is separated from the modulation signal. DC The modulation signal is not altered. Example: :SOUR:FM:EXT:COUP AC *RST value is AC [:SOURce]:FM1|2:INTernal The settings for the internal FM generators are effected under this node. For FM1, this is always the internal LF generator. Here the same hardware is set for FM1, PM1, AM:INT as well as SOURce2. For FM2, only the external sources can be used (not the internal LF generator). This means that, e.g., the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect: SOUR:AM:INT:FREQ SOUR:FM:INT:FREQ SOUR:PM:INT:FREQ SOUR2:FREQ:CW 1125.5555.03 3.78 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:FM Subsystem [:SOURce]:FM1|2:INTernal:FREQuency 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency. Example: :SOUR:FM:INT:FREQ 10kHz [:SOURce]:FM1|2:PREemphasis 0 | 50us | 75us The command selects the preemphasis. 0 No preemphasis 50 us 50 µs, European standard 50 µs 75 us 75 µs, American standard 75 µs Example: :SOUR:FM:PRE 50us *RST value is 1 kHz *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FM1|2:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 The command selects the modulation source. A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1. The LF generator is INT for FM1. The external and the internal modulation source can be indicated at the same time (see example) *RST value for FM1: INT Example: :SOUR:FM:SOUR INT1, EXT2 for FM2:EXT2 [:SOURce]:FM1|2:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the frequency modulation on or off. Example: SOUR:FM:STAT OFF 1125.5555.03 3.79 *RST value is OFF. E-9 SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem 3.5.14.7 SMIQ SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings of the RF source including the sweeps. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :FREQuency :CENTer 300 kHz to RFmax Hz RFmax depends on model [:CW|:FIXed] 300 kHz to RFmax Hz RFmax depends on model Hz RFmax depends on model :RCL INCLude | EXCLude :MANual 300 kHz to RFmax :MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep | LIST :OFFSet -50 to +50 GHz Hz :SPAN 0 to RFmax Hz RFmax depends on model :STARt 300 kHz to RFmax Hz RFmax depends on model :STOP 300 kHz to RFmax Hz RFmax depends on model 0 to 1 GHz Hz :STEP [:INCRement] [:SOURce]:FREQuency:CENTer 300 kHz to RFmax (RFmax depending on model) The command sets the sweep range by means of the center frequency. This command is coupled to commands :SOURce:FREQuency:STARt and :SOURce:FREQuency:STOP. In this command, value OFFSet is considered as with input value FREQUENCY in the header field. Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for OFFSet = 0. The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Frequency Offset" as well): 300 kHz + OFFSet to 2.2 GHz +OFFSet *RST value is (STARt +STOP)/2 Example: :SOUR:FREQ:CENT 100kHz [:SOURce]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed] 300 kHz to RFmax (RFmax depending on model) The command sets the frequency for CW operation. This value is coupled to the current sweep frequency. In addition to a numeric value, UP and DOWN can be indicated. The frequency is increased or reduced by the value set under :SOURce:FREQuency:STEP. (As to specified range, cf. FREQuency:CENTer). Example: *RST value is 100 MHz :SOUR:FREQ:CW 100kHz [:SOURce]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:RCL INCLude | EXCLude The command determines the effect of the recall function on the frequency. *RST value has no effect to this setting. INCLude The saved frequency is loaded when instrument settings are loaded with the [RECALL] key or with a memory sequence. EXCLude The RF frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded, the current settings are maintained. Example: :SOUR:FREQ:RCL INCL [:SOURce]:FREQuency:MANual 300 kHz to RFmax (RFmax depending on model) The command sets the frequency if SOUR:SWE:MODE MAN and SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE are set. Only frequency values between the settings with :SOUR:FREQ:STAR and :SOUR:FREQ:STOP are permitted. (As to specified range, cf. FREQ:CENT) *RST value is 100 MHz Example: 1125.5555.03 :SOUR:FREQ:MAN 500MHz 3.80 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem [:SOURce]:FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep | LIST The command specifies the operating mode and hence also specifies which commands check the FREQuency subsystem. The following allocations are valid CW | FIXed CW and FIXed are synonyms. The output frequency is specified by means of :SOUR:FREQ:CW | FIX. SWEep LIST The instrument operates in the SWEep operating mode. The frequency is specified by means of commands SOUR:FREQ:STAR; STOP; CENT; SPAN; MAN. The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings. The settings are effected in the SOURce:LIST subsystem. Setting SOUR :FREQ:MODE LIST automatically sets command SOUR:POW:MODE to LIST as well. Example: :SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE *RST value is CW [:SOURce]:FREQuency:OFFSet -50 to + 50 GHz The command sets the frequency offset of an instrument which might be series-connected, e.g. a mixer. (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Frequency Offset"). If a frequency offset is entered, the frequency entered using SOURce:FREQuency: to does no longer correspond to the RF output frequency. The following connection is true: SOURce:FREQuency:to = RF output frequency + SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet. Entering an offset does not alter the RF output frequency but the query value of SOURce:FREQuency:.. Example: *RST value is 0 :SOUR:FREQ:OFFS 100MHz [:SOURce]:FREQuency:SPAN 0 to RFmax (RFmax depending on model) This command indicates the frequency range for the sweep. This parameter is coupled to the start and stop frequency. Negative values for SPAN are permitted, then STARt > STOP is true. There is the following connection: STARt = CENTer – SPAN/2 STOP = CENTer + SPAN/2 *RST value is (STOP - STARt) Example: :SOUR:FREQ:SPAN 1GHz [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STARt 300 kHz to RFmax (RFmax depending on model) This command indicates the starting value of the frequency for the sweep operation. Parameters STARt, STOP, SPAN and CENTer are coupled to each other. STARt may be larger than STOP. (As to specified range, cf. FREQuency:CENTer). *RST value is 100MHz Example: :SOUR:FREQ:STAR 1MHz [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STOP 300 kHz to RFmax (RFmax depending on model) This command indicates the final value of the frequency for the sweep operation (see STARt as well). (As to specified range, cf. FREQuency:CENTer). *RST value is 500MHz Example: :SOUR:FREQ:STOP 100MHz [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STEP The command to enter the step width for the frequency setting if frequency values UP or DOWN are used is under this node. This command is coupled to the KNOB STEP command in manual control. Only linear step widths can be set. [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] 0 to 1 GHz The command sets the step width for the frequency setting. Example: :SOUR:FREQ:STEP:INCR 1MHz 1125.5555.03 3.81 *RST value is 1MHz E-9 SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem 3.5.14.8 SMIQ SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem The FSIM system comprises the commands for the fading simulator (options SMIQB14, SMIQB15, SMIQB49). Command [:SOURce] :FSIMulator [:STANdard] [:STATe] :CONFigure :SEQuence :RESet :IGNore :RFCHanges :STANdard :SPEed :UNIT :ILOSs :MODE :COUPle :SPEed :CORRelation :COEFficient :LOGNormal :LCONstant :CSTD :CFACtor :EXTern? :DEFault :PATH :STATe :PROFile :DCOMponent :STATe :PRATio :FRATio :CPHase :SPEed :FDOPpler :LOSS :DELay :CORRelation :PATH :COEFficent :PHASe :LOGNormal :STATe :LCONstant :CSTD 1125.5555.03 Parameter DefaultUnit Remark Option SMIQB14 ON | OFF S6Path | S12Path | D6Path RUN | STOP S12P/D6P only w. SMIQB15 ON | OFF CDMA8 | CDMA30 | CDMA100 | NADC8 | NADC50 | NADC100 | GTU3 | G6TU3 | GTU50 | G6TU50 | GHT100 |G6HT100 | GRA250 | GET50 | GET100 | PTU1 | P6TU1 | PTU50 | P6TU50 | PHT100 | P6HT100 | PRA130 | PET50 | PET100 | TTU | THT | TET MPS | KMPH | MPH NORMal | LACP ON | OFF ON | OFF ON | OFF ON | OFF query only = [1] | 2 to 6 (12) ON | OFF PDOPpler | RAYLeigh | RICE | CPHase ON | OFF -30.0 to +30.0 dB -1.0 to +1.0 0 to 360 0.005 to 27 777 MPS 7 to 12 only with SMIQB15 dB DEG depending on FSIM:SPE:UNIT: MPS | KMPH | MPH 0.1 to 1600.0 Hz 0 to 50.0 dB 0 to 1638.0E-6 Hz dB s 0 | 7 to 12 0 to 359 DEG ON | OFF 1 to 99 999 0 to 12.0 dB 3.82 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem With option SMIQB49 only Command Parameter Default unit Remarks [:SOURce] :FSIMulator Option SMIQB14 :FDELay FineDelay [:STATe] ON | OFF :STANdard G3C1 | G3C2 | G3C3 G3C4 | G3UEC1 | G3UEC2 | G3UEC3 | G3UEC4 | G3UEC5 | G3UEC6 :SPEed :UNIT MPS | KMPH | MPH :DEFault (without) :PATH = [1] | 2 to 4 3 and 4 only with SMIQB15 :STATe ON | OFF :PROFile PDOPpler | RAYLeigh :FRATio -1.0 to +1.0 :SPEed 0.005 to 27 777 MPS :FDOPpler 0.1 to 1600.0 Hz :LOSS 0 to 50.0 dB dB :DELay 25 ns to 1637 us s depending on FSIM:SPE:UNIT: MPS | KMPH | MPH Hz :MDELay MovingDelay [:STATe] ON | OFF :DEFault (without) :REFerence :LOSS 0 to 50.0 dB dB :DELay 0 to 1638.0E-6 s 0 to 50.0 dB dB :MEAN 0.25 us to 1637.8 us s :VARiation 300 ns to 100 us s 10 s to 500 s s :MOVing :LOSS :DELay :VPERiod s :BIRThdeath [:STATe] ON | OFF :SPEed :UNIT MPS | KMPH | MPH :ILOSs :MODE NORMal | LACP :DEFault (without) :PATH = [1] | 2 :PROFile PDOPpler :FRATio -1.0 to +1.0 :SPEed 0.005 to 27 777 MPS :FDOPpler 0.1 to 1600.0 Hz :LOSS 0 to 50.0 dB dB :DELay 5 us to 1000 us s 100 ms to 5.0s s depending on FSIM:SPE:UNIT: MPS | KMPH | MPH Hz :HOPPing :DWELl 1125.5555.03 3.83 only PATH1 E-9 SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:FSIMulator[] The standard settings for the fading simulator that are available without Option SMIQB49 are under this node. [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:ALL[:STATe] ON | OFF This command switches the fading simulator on or off. The switch-on states of subgroups Standard, FDELay, MDELay and BIRThdeath remain unchanged. If, however, one of the subgroups is switched on (...:STATE ON), ON is automatically set. Example: :SOUR:FSIM OFF *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator][:STATe] ON | OFF Switches the standard fading on or off. Example: :SOUR:FSIM ON *RST value: OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:CONFigure S6Path | S12Path | D6Path Defines the number of active paths and channels. S12Path and D6Path are only possible with option SMIQB15. S6Path Single channel, 6 active paths S12Path Single channel, 12 active paths D6Path Dual channel, 6 active paths Example: :SOUR:FSIM:CONF S6P *RST value: S6P/S12P (without/with option SMIQB15) [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:SEQuence RUN | STOP This command starts (RUN) or stops (STOP) the Pseudo Noise Generator for generating the fading process. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:SEQ RUN *RST value: STOP [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:SEQuence:RESet This command resets the pseudo random sequence for the fading to its original value. FSIMulator:SEQuence is set to STOP (and has to be restarted with RUN). Since this command triggers an event it has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:SEQ:RES [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:IGNore:RFCHanges This command sets the status for recalculating the fading signals. When ON is selected, RF changes <5% do no longer cause a recalculation. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:IGN:RFCH ON *RST value is OFF 1125.5555.03 3.84 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem [:SOURce]:FSIMulator[:STANdard CDMA8 | CDMA30 | ..... Selects the fading standard. All subsequent FSIM commands are set to a predefined value. The parameters with a '6' as second character select the 6-path mode (this mode must be set if option SMIQB15, Second Fading Generator is not available). CDMA8. CDMA30, CDMA100 NADC8, NADC50, NADC100 GTU3, G6TU2, GTU50, G6TU50 GSM Typical Urban GHT100, G6HT100 GSM Hilly Terrain GRA250 GSM Rural Area GET50, GET100 GSM Equal Test PTU1, P6TU1, PTU50, P6TU50 DCS1800/PCS1900 Typical Urban PHT100, P6HT100 DCS1800/PCS1900 Hilly Terrain PRA130 DCS1800/PCS1900 Rural Area PET50, PET100 DCS1800/PCS1900 Equal Test TTU Tetra Typical Urban THT Tetra Hilly Terrain, TET Tetra Equal Test Example: :SOUR:FSIM:STAN NADC50 *RST value: CDMA8 1125.5555.03 3.85 E-9 SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:SPEed:UNIT MPS | KMPH | MPH This command selects the speed unit. MPS m/s, meter per second KMPH km/h, kilometer per hour MPH miles per hour Example: :SOUR:FSIM:SPE:UNIT MPH *RST value: MPS [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:ILOSs:MODE NORMal | LACP This command sets the insertion loss of the fading simulator. NORMal The insertion loss is fixed to 18 dB, which is ideal for BER measurements. LACP The insertion loss is between 12 and 14 dB to obtain a better S/N ratio, for instance during adjacent-channel measurements. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:ILOS:MODE LACP *RST value is NORM [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:COUPle The commands for coupling the settings for all paths are under this node. If the following coupling commands are set to ON, the modification of a value for a path (path) will be accepted by all other paths. When switching for the first time from OFF to ON, all paths will be set to the value of path 1. [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:COUPle:SPEed ON | OFF This command couples the setting of :FSIM:PATH:SPE for all paths. Example: *RST value is OFF :SOUR:FSIM:COUP:SPE ON [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:COUPle:CORRelation:COEFficient ON | OFF This command couples the setting of :FSIM:PATH:CORR:COEF for all paths. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:COUP:CORR:COEF ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:COUPle:LOGNormal:LCONstant ON | OFF This command couples the setting of :FSIM:PATH:LOGN:LCON for all paths. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:COUP:LOGN:LCON ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:COUPle:LOGNormal:CSTD ON | OFF This command couples the setting of :FSIM:PATH:LOGN:CSTD for all paths. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:COUP:LOGN:CSTD ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:CFACtor:EXTern? With this command the crest factor to be set on the second SMIQ can be read out (for 2-channel fading). Example: :SOUR:FSIM:CFAC:EXT? [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:DEFault This command selects the default setting of the path parameters. Path 1 is switched on; all other paths are switched off. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:DEF 1125.5555.03 3.86 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem [:SOURce]:FSIMulator[:PATH The following commands can be separately set for each path. The path is selected with the suffix ; being assigned a value from 1 to 6 (one fading simulator) or 1 to 12 (two fading simulators). [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:STATE ON | OFF This command switches the selected path on or off. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:PROFile PDOPpler | RAYLeigh | RICE | CPHase This command assigns a fading profile (scattering image) to the selected path. PDOPpler pure Doppler profile. RAYLeigh standard Rayleigh profile RICE standard Rice profile CPHase constant phase Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:PROF RICE *RST value is RAYL [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:DCOMponent:STATe ON | OFF This command switches the discrete components on or off. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:CCOM:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:PRATio -30 to +30 dB This command sets the power ratio (for RICE profile only). The resolution is 0.1 dB. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:PRAT -20 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:FRATio -1.0 to +1.0 The command sets the frequency ratio (for RICE profile only). The resolution is 0.1. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:FRAT 0.5 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:CPHase 0 to 360 DEG The command sets the phase for CPHAS fading. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH6:CPH 20.0 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:SPEed 0.005 to 27 777 ( in MPS (m/s)) This command sets the vehicle speed. The unit is defined separately with the command FSIM:SPEed:UNIT. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:SPE 10.0 *RST value is 20 MPS [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:FDOPpler 0.1 to 1600 Hz This command specifies the Doppler frequency (coupled to the vehicle speed). The resolution is 0.1 Hz. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:FDOP 100 *RST value is 6.7 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:LOSS 0 to 50.0 dB This command sets the path loss. The resolution is 0.1 dB. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:LOSS 20 1125.5555.03 3.87 *RST value is 0 E-9 SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:DELay 0 to 1638.0E-6 This command sets the signal delay in the path. The resolution is 50 ns. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:DEL 123E-6 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:CORRelation This node provides the commands for setting the correlation to another path (only with option SMIQB15). [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:CORRelation:PATH 0 | 7 to 12 This command defines the correlating path 7 to 12 for path . If no correlation exists, 0 is selected. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:CORR:PATH 12 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:CORRelation:COEFficent 0 to 1.0 This command sets the correlation coefficient. The resolution is 0.05. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:CORR:COEF 0.3 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:CORRelation:PHASe 0 to 359 degree This command sets the correlation phase. The resolution is 1 degree. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:CORR:PHAS 180 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:LOGNormal This node provides the commands for setting the lognormal fading. [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:LOGNormal:STATe ON | OFF This command switches lognormal fading on or off. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:LOGN:STAT OFF *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:LOGNormal:LCONstant 1 to 99 999 This command enters the local constant in meters. The unit is not a component of this command. The resolution is 0.1 m. *RST value is 200 Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:LOGN:LCON 50 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:PATH:LOGNormal:CSTD 0 to 12.0 dB This command sets the standard deviation of lognormal fading. The resolution is 1 dB. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:PATH3:LOGN:CSTD 2.0 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay[:STATe] ON | OFF This command switches the fine delay fading simulation on or off. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:STANdard G3C1 | G3C2 | G3C3| G3C4| G3UEC1| G3UEC2| G3UEC3| G3UEC4| G3UEC5| G3UEC6 This command selects the fading standard for the fine delay simulation. G3C1 3GPP_BS_4.1.0._Case1 G3C2 3GPP_BS_4.1.0._Case2 (with SMIQ15 only) G3C3 3GPP_BS_4.1.0._Case3 (with SMIQ15 only) 1125.5555.03 3.88 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem G3C4 3GPP_BS_4.1.0._Case4 (with SMIQ15 only) G3UEC1 G3UEC2 G3UEC3 G3UEC4 G3UEC5 G3UEC6 3GPP_UE_4.1.0._Case1 3GPP_UE_4.1.0._Case2 (with SMIQ15 only) 3GPP_UE_4.1.0._Case3 (with SMIQ15 only) 3GPP_UE_4.1.0._Case4 3GPP_UE_4.1.0._Case5 3GPP_UE_4.1.0._Case6( only with SMIQ15) Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:STAN G3C1 :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:STAN G3UEC1 *RST value is G3C1 (G3C2 with SMIQB15) [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:SPEed:UNIT MPS | KMPH | MPH This command sets the unit for the speed of fine delay simulation. MPS m/s, meter per second KMPH Km/h, kilometer per hour MPH Miles per hour Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:SPE:UNIT MPH *RST value is MPS [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:DEFault This command sets the default setting of the path parameters for the fine delay simulation (as for *RST). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:DEF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:PATH The following commands can be set individually for each path. The path is selected with suffix which has valid values of 1 to 4 (3 and 4 only with option SMIQB15). [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:PATH:STATE ON | OFF This command activates or deactivates the selected path for the fine delay simulation. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:PATH3:STAT ON *RST value is path 1, 2 ON; 3, 4 OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:PATH:PROFile PDOPpler | RAYLeigh This command assigns the selected path a fading profile for the fine delay simulation. PDOPpler Pure Doppler Profile RAYLeigh Standard Rayleigh Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:PATH3:PROF PDOP *RST value is RAYL [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:PATH:FRATio -1.0 to +1.0 This command sets the frequency ratio (Freq. Ratio) for the fine delay simulation. The resolution is 0.1. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:PATH3:FRAT 0.5 *RST value is 1 1125.5555.03 3.89 E-9 SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:PATH:SPEed 0.005 to 27 777 (in MPS (m/s)) This command sets the speed of the moving receiver for the fine delay simulation. The unit is specified with the FSIM:SPEed:UNIT command and is not part of this command. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:PATH3:SPE 10.0 *RST value is 20 MPS [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:PATH:FDOPpler 0.1 to 1600 Hz This command defines the Doppler frequency (coupled with the vehicle speed) for the fine delay simulation. The resolution is 0.1 dB. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:PATH3:FDOP 100 *RST value is 6.7 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:PATH:LOSS 0 to 50.0 dB This command enters the signal loss in the path for the fine delay simulation. The resolution is 0.1 dB. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:PATH3:LOSS 20 *RST value is 0 (PATH1) 3 (PATH2) 6 (PATH3) 9 (PATH4) [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:FDELay:PATH:DELay 25ns to 1637us This command enters the signal delay in the path for the fine delay simulation. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:FDEL:PATH3:DEL 123E-6 *RST value is 25 ns [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:MDELay[:STATe] ON | OFF This command switches the moving delay simulation on or off. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:MDEL ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:MDELay:DEFault This command sets the default setting of the path parameters for the moving delay simulation (as for *RST). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:MDEL:DEF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:MDELay:REFerence:LOSS 0 to 50.0 dB This command enters the signal loss in the path for the moving delay simulation. The resolution is 0.1 dB. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:MDEL:REF:LOSS 20 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:MDELay:REFerence:DELay 0 to 1638.0E-6S This command enters the signal delay in the path for the moving delay simulation. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:MDEL:REF:DEL 123E-6 *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.90 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:MDELay:MOVing:LOSS 0 to 50.0 dB This command enters the signal loss in the path for the moving delay simulation. The resolution is 0.1 dB. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:MDEL:MOV:LOSS 20 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:MDELay:MOVing:DELay:MEAN 0.25us to 1637.8us This command enters the mean value of the moving path delay for the moving delay simulation. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:MDEL:MOV:DEL:MEAN 123E-6 *RST value is 5 us [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:MDELay:MOVing:DELay:VARiation 300ns to 100us This command enters the range for delay variation for the moving path (moving delay simulation). Example: :SOUR:FSIM:MDEL:MOV:DEL:VAR 123E-6 *RST value is 5 us [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:MDELay:MOVing:VPERiod 10 to 500s This command enters the speed of delay variation in the path for the moving delay simulation. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:MDEL:MOV:VPER 12 *RST value is 157 s [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath[:STATe] ON | OFF This command switches the Birth-Death simulation on or off. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:SPEed:UNIT MPS | KMPH | MPH This command sets the unit for the speed of Birth-Death simulation. MPS m/s, meter per second KMPH Km/h, kilometer per hour MPH Miles per hour Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:SPE:UNIT MPH *RST value is MPS [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:ILOSs:MODE NORMal | LACP This command sets the insertion loss of the fading simulator for the Birth-Death simulation. NORMal The insertion loss is fixed to 18 dB, which is optimal for BER measurements. LACP The insertion loss is between 12 and 14 dB to obtain a better S/N ratio, for instance during adjacent-channel measurements. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:ILOS:MODE LACP *RST value is NORM [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:DEFault This command sets the default setting of the path parameters for the Birth-Death simulation (as after *RST). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:DEF [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:PATH The following commands can be set individually for each path. The path is selected with suffix which has valid values of 1 to 2. 1125.5555.03 3.91 E-9 SOURce:FSIM-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:PATH:PROFile PDOPpler This command assigns the selected path a fading profile for the Birth-Death simulation. PDOPpler Pure Doppler profile Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:PATH2:PROF PDOP *RST value is PDOP [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:PATH:FRATio -1.0 to +1.0 This command sets the frequency ratio for the Birth-Death simulation. The resolution is 0.1. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:PATH2:FRAT 0.5 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:PATH:SPEed 0.005 to 27 777 (in MPS (m/s)) This command sets the speed of the moving receiver for the Birth-Death simulation. The unit is specified with the FSIM:SPEed:UNIT command and is not part of this command. The value can only be set for path 1 and is taken for PATH2. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:PATH:SPE 10.0 *RST value is 27.778 MPS [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:PATH:FDOPpler 0.1 to 1600 Hz This command defines the Doppler frequency (coupled with the vehicle speed). The resolution is 0.1 dB. The value can only be set for path 1 and is taken for PATH2. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:PATH:FDOP 100 *RST value is 9.3 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:PATH:LOSS 0 to 50.0 dB This command enters the signal loss in the path for the Birth-Death simulation. The resolution is 0.1 dB. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:PATH2:LOSS 20 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:PATH:DELay 5us to 1000us This command enters the signal delay in the path for the Birth-Death simulation. The value can only be set for path 1 and is taken for PATH2. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:PATH:DEL 123E-6 *RST value is 5us [:SOURce]:FSIMulator:BIRThdeath:PATH:HOPPing:DWELl 100ms to 5s This command sets the dwell time up to the next Birth-Death action. Example: :SOUR:FSIM:BIRT:PATH:HOPP:DWEL 12.3MS 1125.5555.03 3.92 *RST value is 191 ms E-9 SMIQ SOURce:GPS Subsystem 3.5.14.9 SOURce:GPS Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for simulating a GPS satellite. Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :GPS :STATe ON | OFF :PRESet :STANdard (without) :RF (without) :SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger | SINGle :TRIGger :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :DELay 0 to 20 359 (chips) :INHibit 0 to 67 108 863 (chips) :OUTPut[1]|2 CODE | NBIT | NWORd | SFRame | FRAMe :POLarity POSitive | NEGative :DELay 0 to 6 137 999 (chips) :CURRent :FREQuency? Hz Query only :SRATe? (symb/s) Query only :DSHift -10kHz to 10kHz Hz :SRATe 500 000.0 to 1 500 000.0 (symb/s) :CODE 1 to 37 :DATA PATTern | DLISt :PATTern #B0 to #B1111111111111111, 1 to 16 :DLISt ‘name‘ 1 to 16 bit :DLISt :CATalog? Þ name, name... Query only [:SOURce]:GPS:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the signal generation of a simulated GPS satellite on or off. Example: :SOUR:GPS:STAT ON. *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:GPS:PRESet:STANdard The command sets all the modulation parameters to the values of the GPS standard as with *RST (i.e., it does not set the parameters selected with the:GPS:PRES:RF command described below, the GPS triggers or the GPS-sequence parameter. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:GPS:PRES:STAN 1125.5555.03 3.93 E-9 SOURce:GPS Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:GPS:PRESet:RF The command sets the RF-parameter frequency to 1.57542 GHz and level to –125 dBm (the values of the GPS standard). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:GPS:PRES:RF [:SOURce]:GPS:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the sequence. AAUTo is ARMED AUTO ARETrigger is ARMED RETRIG Example: :SOUR:GPS:SEQ AAUT *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:GPS:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering in remote control is via the Trigger command, or via the Execute command in manual control. Example: :SOUR:GPS:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:GPS:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 20359 The command specifies the delay for an external trigger signal in number of chips prior to initiating a start. Example: :SOUR:GPS:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GPS:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 The command sets the retrigger suppression time (in number of chips). Example: :SOUR:GPS:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GPS:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2 CODE | NBIT | NWORd | SFRame | FRAMe The command selects the signal for trigger output 1 or 2. CODE At the beginning of the C/A code sequence SFRame Sub Frame Example: :SOUR:GPS:TRIG:OUTP2 NBIT *RST value OUTP1: NWOR, OUTP2: SFR [:SOURce]:GPS:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:POLarity POSitive | NEGative The command sets the polarity of the signal at trigger output 1 or 2. Example: :SOUR:GPS:TRIG:OUTP2:POL NEG *RST value is POS [:SOURce]:GPS:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:DELay 0 to 6137999 The command determines the delay of the signal at trigger output 1 or 2 in number of chips. Example: :SOUR:GPS:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 16 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GPS:CURRent:FREQuency? The command queries the physically output carrier frequency. Example: :SOUR:GPS:CURR:FREQ? 1125.5555.03 3.94 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:GPS Subsystem [:SOURce]:GPS:CURRent:SRATe? The command queries the resulting symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:GPS:CURR:SRAT? [:SOURce]:GPS:DSHift –10 kHz to 10 kHz The command sets the Doppler shift. Example: :SOUR:GPS:DSH -2.1 kHz *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GPS:SRATe 500000 to 1500000 The command sets the symbol rate (in symb/s) (without Doppler shift). Example: :SOUR:GPS:SRAT 1020000 [:SOURce]:GPS:CODE 1 to 37 The command sets the C/A code for spreading the navigation data. Example: :SOUR:GPS:CODE 19 [:SOURce]:GPS:DATA PATTern | DLISt The command determines the data source for the navigation data. Example: :SOUR:GPS:DATA DLIS *RST value is 1023000 *RST value is 1 *RST value is PATT [:SOURce]:GPS:DATA:PATTern #B0 to #B111 to 1, 1 to 24 This command sets the bit pattern used for :SOUR:GPS:DATA PATT. The first parameter sets the bit pattern (optionally in hex, oct or bin notation); the second indicates the number of bits to be used. Example: :SOUR:GPS:DATA:PATT #H3F,8 *RST value is #B0,1 [:SOURce]:GPS:DATA:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list is only used if DLIS is set as the data source with the :GPS:DATA command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:GPS:DATA:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:GPS:DLISt:CATalog? The command returns a list of all the user-defined data lists for GPS. Example: :SOUR:GPS:DLIS:CAT? 1125.5555.03 3.95 E-9 SOURce:GSM Subsystem (Digital Standard GSM/EDGE) SMIQ 3.5.14.10 SOURce:GSM Subsystem (Digital Standard GSM/EDGE) Note: #B0 to #B1 are characters which are entered in binary form manually. SCPI (and IEEE 488.2) also accept the entry of non-numeric characters in octal and hex such as #H|h <0 to 9, A|a to F|f>, #Q|q <0 to 7> and #B|b <0|1>. The characters are always output in binary format after a query. Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :GSM :STATe ON | OFF :STANdard (without) :FORMat GMSK | GFSK No query :FSK :DEViation :SRATe 1kHz to 300 kHz Hz 1kHz to 300 kHz Hz :FILTer :TYPE GAUSs :PARameter 0.2 to 0.7 :SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 :DELay 0 to 65535 :OUTPut[1|2] SLOT | FRAMe Output 1 only :DELay 0 to 1249 :POLarity POSitive | NEGative :PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 Output 2 only :CLOCk :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :DELay 0 to 1.0 :PRAMp :PRESet (without) :TIME 0.25 to 16 :SHAPe LINear | COSine :DELay -1.0 to +1.0 :ROFFset -9 to +9 :FOFFset -9 to +9 No query DB :SLOT :ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB :FLISt :PREDefined :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... :LOAD ‘name’ query only :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... :LOAD ‘name’ :STORe ‘name’ No query :DELete ‘name’ No query 1125.5555.03 Query only 3.96 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:GSM Subsystem (Digital Standard GSM/EDGE) Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :GSM :DLISt :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... Query only i=0,[1],2 to 7 (Slot Selector) :SLOT :TYPE NORMal | DUMMy | ADATa | EDGE :LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL :PRESet (without) :HOPPing :TRIGger ON | OFF [:SOURce] PN9 | PN11| PN15 | PN 16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa :DATA :DLISt ‘name’ 0|1 :SF :TSC :SELect T0 to T7 | USER :USER #B0 to #B1111 to (26 bits) [:SOURce]:GSM:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the modulation on according to GSM standard. All other standards that might be switched on or digital modulation are automatically switched OFF. Example: :SOUR:GSM:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:GSM:STANdard The command sets all modulation parameters to the values of the GSM standard. I.e., all values that have been selected by the :GSM:SLOT... commands described in the following are not valid. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:GSM:STAN [:SOURce]:GSM:FORMat GMSK | GFSK This command selects the modulation type. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FORM GFSK *RST value is GMSK [:SOURce]:GSM:FSK:DEViation 1kHz to 300 kHz This command sets the deviation for GSM:FORMat GFSK. The range of values depends on the symbol rate (GSM:SRATe). Example: :SOUR:GSM:FSK:DEV 37.6kHz *RST value is 67.708 kHz [:SOURce]:GSM:SRATe 1kHz to 300 kHz The command sets the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:GSM:SRAT 270.9 kHz *RST value is 270.833 kHz [:SOUrce]:GSM:FILTer:TYPE GAUSs The command selects the filter type. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FILT:TYPE USER *RST value is GAUS 1125.5555.03 3.97 E-9 SOURce:GSM Subsystem (Digital Standard GSM/EDGE) [:SOURce]:GSM:FILTer:PARameter 0.2 to 0.7 The command sets the filter parameter. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FILT:PAR 0.4 SMIQ *RST value is 0.3 [:SOURce]:GSM:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the sequence. AAUTo is ARMED AUTO ARETrigger is ARMED RETRIG Example: :SOUR:GSM:SEQ AAUT *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:GSM:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering is via IEC/IEEE bus or the Execute command in manual control. Example: :SOUR:GSM:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:GSM:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:GSM:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GSM:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 65535 The command sets the trigger delay (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:GSM:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GSM:TRIGger:OUTPut SLOT | FRAMe The command selects the signal for trigger output 1 (output 2 is always FRAMe). Example: :SOUR:GSM:TRIG:OUTP SLOT *RST value is FRAM [:SOURce]:GSM:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:POLarity POSitive | NEGative The command sets the polarity of the signal at trigger output 1 or 2. Example: :SOUR:GSM:TRIG:OUTP2:POL NEG *RST value is POS [:SOURce]:GSM:TRIGgerOUTPut[1|2]:DELay 0 to 1249 The command determines the delay of the signal at trigger output 2 in comparison with the start of the frames/slots in number of symbols. Example: :SOUR:GSM:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 16 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GSM:TRIGger:OUTPut[2]:PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 The command sets the repeat rate (in number of frames) of the signal at trigger output 2. Example: :SOUR:GSM:TRIG:OUTP2:PER 8 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:GSM:CLOCk The commands for setting the data clock are under this node. [:SOURce]:GSM:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the source for the DM data clock. 1125.5555.03 3.98 E-9 SMIQ INTernal EXTernal Example: SOURce:GSM Subsystem (Digital Standard GSM/EDGE) The internal clock generator is used and output via the clock outputs of the serial and parallel interface. The clock is externally fed in via the serial interface and output via the parallel interface. :SOUR:GSM:CLOC:SOUR INT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:GSM:CLOCk:DELay 0 to 1.0 The command sets the delay of the symbol clock (as a fraction of the length of a symbol). Example: :SOUR:GSM:CLOC:DEL 0.75 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GSM:PRAMp The commands for the level control of the burst are under this node. [:SOURce]:GSM:PRAMp:PRESet This command sets the standard-stipulated values for the following commands of level control. It is an event and hence has no query and no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:GSM:PRAM:PRES [:SOURce]:GSM:PRAMp:TIME 0.25 to 16.0 The command sets the cutoff steepness (in symbol clocks). Example: :SOUR:GSM:PRAM:TIME 2.5 *RST value is 5 [:SOURce]:GSM:PRAMp:DELay -1.0 to + 1.0 The command defines the shift of the envelope characteristic to the modulated signal. A positive value causes a delay of the envelope. Example: :SOUR:GSM:PRAM:DEL 0.2 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GSM:PRAMp:SHAPe LINear | COSine The command selects the linear or cosine shape of the ramp-up and ramp-down (power burst). Example: :SOUR:GSM:PRAM:SHAP COS *RST value is COS [:SOURce]:GSM:PRAMp:ROFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the (‘R’ising) edge of a power burst to the beginning of the block. Example: :SOUR:GSM:PRAM:ROFF -3 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:GSM:PRAMp:FOFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the ('F'alling) edge of a power burst to the data block. Example: :SOUR:GSM:PRAM:FOFF 4 *RST value is -1 [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT:ATTenuation 0 to -70 dB The command determines the amount by which the power of the slots marked by :GSM:SLOT:LEVel ATT is reduced in comparison with the normal output power (attribute to :LEVel FULL). Example: :SOUR:GSM:SLOT:ATT 20 dB *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.99 E-9 SOURce:GSM Subsystem (Digital Standard GSM/EDGE) SMIQ [:SOURce]:GSM:FLISt The commands for storing and reading complete frames including their bursts (slots) are under this node. Predefined and user-generated frames have to be distinguished. [:SOURce]:GSM:FLISt:PREDefined:CATalog? The command returns a list of all predefined frames. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FLIS:PRED:CAT? [:SOURce]:GSM:FLISt:PREDefined:LOAD ‘name’ The command selects one of the predefined (fixed) frames (c.f. Chapter 2). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FLIS:PRED:LOAD ’NB0’ [:SOURce]:GSM:FLISt:CATalog? The command returns a list of all user-defined frames. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:GSM:FLISt:LOAD ‘name’ The command loads a user-defined frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FLIS:LOAD ’test’ [:SOURce]:GSM:FLISt:STORe ‘name’ The command stores the current frame under a name. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FLIS:STOR ’test’ [:SOURce]:GSM:FLISt:DELete ‘name’ The command deletes the indicated frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:GSM:FLIS:DEL ’test1’ [:SOURce]:GSM:DLISt:CATalog? The command returns an enumeration of all data lists. These data lists are selected by means of :GSM:SLOT:DATA if:GSM:SLOT:DATA DLISt is set. Example: ‘name’ and used :SOUR:GSM:DLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT The commands for setting the slot characteristics are under this node. Since a frame contains 8 slots, suffix ‘i’ is used to select the slot to be changed. i = 0 | [1] | 2 | 3 | 3 | 5 | 6 | 7 [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT:TYPE NORM | DUMMy | ADATa | EDGE The command selects the type of burst (slot) defined in the standard. ADATa is All Data Example: :SOUR:GSM:SLOT2:TYPE DUMM 1125.5555.03 3.100 *RST value is NORM E-9 SMIQ SOURce:GSM Subsystem (Digital Standard GSM/EDGE) [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT:LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL The command determines the power stage of the slot. OFF The slot is inactive ATT The power is reduced by the amount defined by :GSM:SLOT:ATT FULL Example: Full power (predefined by level setting) :SOUR:GSM:SLOT2:LEV ATT Slot 0: *RST value is FULL Slot 1 to 7: *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT:PRESet The command sets all the parameters of the slot to the values defined by the standard as a function of the type set above. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:GSM:SLOT2:PRES [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT:HOPPing:TRIGger ON | OFF This command provides a trigger signal at the PARDATA connector (ON). This signal can be used to perform frequency hopping in the LIST MODE. Example: :SOUR:GSM:SLOT2:HOPP:TRIG ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT[:SOURce]:DATA PN9 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the data words (for :SLOT:TYPE NORM and ADATa). Example: :SOUR:GSM:SLOT2:DATA PN15 *RST value is PN9 [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT[:SOURce]:DATA:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the :GSM:SLOT:DATA DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :GSM:SLOT:DATA:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT:SF 0 | 1 This command sets the stealing flag (GSM:SLOT:TYPE NORM only) Example: :SOUR:GSM:SLOT2:SFR:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT:TSC:SELect T0 to T7 | USER This commands selects the training sequence code. T0 to T7 are the values stipulated by GSM 5.02. With USER selected as parameter, the given value described with the following ...:TSC:USER command will be used. Example: :SOUR:GSM:SLOT2:TSC:SEL T3 *RST value is T0 [:SOURce]:GSM:SLOT:TSC:USER #B0 to #B1111... (26/78 bits) The TSC value is determined by the user by means of this command. TSC will be used if the parameter (!) USER is set by means of the above-mentioned :GSM:SLOT:TSC:SEL command. The value contains 78 bits only with :GSM:SLOT:TYPE EDGE. Example: :SOUR:GSM:SLOT3:TSC:USER #B01101100110011100011111100 *RST value is 111111111 1125.5555.03 3.101 E-9 SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) SMIQ 3.5.14.11 SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :IS95 :STATe ON | OFF :MODE FLINk18 | FLINk64 | RLINk :PRESet :CRATe Hz 1 kHz to 7 MHz :FILTer :FTYPe SCOSine | COSine | IS95 | EIS95 | USER :RTYPe SCOSine | COSine | IS95 | EIS95 | USER :FSELect ‘name‘ :RSELect ‘name‘ :PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 :MODE LACP | LEVM :LDIStortion [:STATe] :SEQuence ON | OFF AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :INHibit 0 to 67108863 :DELay 0 to 65535 :OUTPut[1]| 2 TFRame | SSRollover | SFRame | ESECond :DELay -32768 to 32768 :POLarity POSitive | NEGative :CLOCk :MODE CHIP | CHIP4 | CHIP8 | CHIP16 :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :DELay 0 to 1.00 query only :POWer? :ADJust - :MAPPing :PREDefined :CATalog? Þ name {,name} :LOAD ‘name’ query only :CATalog? Þ name {,name} query only :LOAD ‘name’ No query :STORe ‘name’ No query :DELete ‘name’ No query :CHANnel<0..63> :WALShcode 0 to 63 :POWer -30 dB to 0 dB :DATA ZERO | ONE | ALTernate | PRBS :STATe ON | OFF :RATE dB FULL | HALF :RANDomizer :[:STATe] :DATA 1125.5555.03 ON | OFF ZERO | ONE | ALTernate | PRBS | DATA 3.102 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :IS95 :DLISt :CATalog? ‘name’ Þ name {,name}... query only :RLCoded :CTYPe TRAF14400 | TRAF7200 | TRAF3600 | TRAF1800 | ACC4800 | TRAF9600 | TRAF4800 | TRAF2400 | TRAF1200 :DATA PN9 | PN11| PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt :DLISt ‘name’ :FQINdicator ON | OFF :CENCoder ON | OFF :BINTerleaver ON | OFF :EBIT 0|1 [:SOURce]:IS95:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the modulation on according to the IS95 standard which is a CDMA method. All other standards or digital modulation that might be switched on are automatically switched off (OFF). Example: :SOUR:IS95:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:IS95:MODE FLINk18 | FLINk64 | RLINk | RLCoded The command selects the operating mode. FLINk18 Forward Link with 18 code channels FLINk64 Forward Link with 64 code channels RLINk Reverse Link (from mobile station to base station) RLCoded Reverse Link Coded Example: :SOUR:IS95:MODE RLIN [:SOURce]:IS95:PRESet The command sets all the following settings into a defined default state (as with to *RST). It can thus be guaranteed that a signal is generated at all and that it is in line with standard. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:IS95:PRES [:SOURce]:IS95:CRATe 1 kHz to 7 MHz The command sets the chip rate. Example: :SOUR:IS95:CRAT 1.21 MHz *RST value is 1.2288 MHz [:SOURce]:IS95:FILTer The commands for selecting a filter are under this node. 1125.5555.03 3.103 E-9 SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) SMIQ [:SOURce]:IS95:FILTer:FTYPe SCOSine | COSine | IS95 | EIS95 | USER The command selects the type of filter for the Forward Link Mode (IS95:FLINk18 or IS95:FLINk64). A filter list should be selected with :DECT:FILT:SEL 'name' for the filter type USER. SCOSine Square root cosine (root Nyquist) filter COSine Cosine (Nyquist)-filter IS95 Filter according to Interim Standard 95 EIS95 IS-95+EQUALIZER Example: :SOUR:IS95:FILT:FTYP COS *RST value is IS95 [:SOURce]:IS95:FILTer:RTYPe SCOSine | COSine | IS95 | EIS95 | USER The command selects the type of filter for the Reverse Link Mode. A filter list should be selected with :IS95:FILT:SEL 'name' for the filter type USER. SCOSine Square root cosine (root Nyquist) filter COSine Cosine (Nyquist)-filter IS95 Filter according to Interim Standard 95 EIS95 IS-95+EQUALIZER Example: :SOUR:IS95:FILT:RTYP COS *RST value is IS95 [:SOURce]:IS95:FILTer:FSELect 'name' The command selects a named filter list. The list is used only if a user-defined filter is selected with :IS95:FILT:FTYPe USER. To generate lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SEL, to fill up lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA. Example: :SOUR:IS95:FILT:FSEL 'test' *RST value is NONE [:SOURce]:IS95:FILTer:RSELect 'name' The command selects a named filter list. The list is used only if a user-defined filter is selected with :IS95:FILT:RTYPe USER. To generate lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SEL, to fill up lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA. Example: :SOUR:IS95:FILT:RSEL 'test' *RST value is NONE [:SOURce]:IS95:FILTer:PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 The command sets the roll-off factor for the COS filters. Example: :SOUR:IS95:FILT:PAR 0.5 [:SOURce]:IS95:FILTer:MODE LACP | LEVM This command selects one of the "L"ow filter modes. Example: :SOUR:IS95:FILT:MODE LEVM [:SOURce]:IS95:LDIStortion[:STATe] ON | OFF The command sets the reduced level for the low-distortion mode. ON Low-distortion mode OFF Normal level Example: :SOUR:IS95:LDIS ON 1125.5555.03 3.104 *RST value is 0.5 *RST value is LACP *RST value is OFF E-9 SMIQ SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) [:SOURce]:IS95:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the sequence.. AUTO Continuously repeated RETRigger Continuously repeated; new start after a trigger AAUTo ARMED AUTO; waits for trigger, then switches over to AUTO and can no longer be triggered; ARETrigger ARMED RETRIG; a trigger event is required to start, each new trigger causes a restart Example: :SOUR:IS95:SEQ AAUT *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:IS95:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering is via remote control using the trigger command or via EXECUTE TRIGGER in case of manual control. EXT The trigger signal is fed in via input TRIGIN INT A start is only possible manually or via the remote control command TRIG:DM:IMM Example: :SOUR:IS95:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:IS95:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67108863 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration (in number of chips). Example: :SOUR:IS95:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:IS95:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 65535 The command defines the trigger delay (in number of chips). Example: :SOUR:IS95:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 [:SOUrce]:IS95:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2 TFRame | SSRollover | SFRame | ESECond | GATE The command defines the output signal at trigger output 1 or 2. The following times can be selected: TFRame Traffic Frame/ 20 ms SSRollover Short Sequence Rollover 80/3 ms SFRame Super Frame 80 ms ESECond Even Second 2 s GATE GATE (PCG) The indicated times apply to a chip rate of 1.2288 Mcps Example: :SOUR:IS95:TRIG:OUTP1 SFR output1: *RST value is ESECond output2: *RST value is SSRollover [:SOURce]:IS95:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:DELay -32768 to 32768 The command defines the delay of trigger signals in chips. Example: :SOUR:IS95:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL -50 [:SOURce]:IS95:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:POLarity POSitive | NEGative The commands defines the polarity of the signals at the trigger outputs. Example: :SOUR:IS95:TRIG:OUTP2:POL NEG 1125.5555.03 3.105 *RST value is 0 *RST value is POS E-9 SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) SMIQ [:SOURce]:IS95:CLOCk The commands for setting the chip clock are under this node. [:SOURce]:IS95:CLOCk:MODE CHIP | CHIP4 | CHIP8 | CHIP16 The command sets the divider for the clock. With CHIP selected, the external clock is in the symbol mode, otherwise in the bit mode. Example: :SOUR:IS95:CLOC:MODE CHIP8 *RST value is CHIP [:SOURce]:IS95:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the clock source. INTernal The internal clock generator is used and output via clock outputs SYMBOL CLOCK and BIT CLOCK. EXTernal The clock is fed externally via connector SYMBOL CLOCK. Example: :SOUR:IS95:CLOC:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:IS95:CLOCk:DELay 0 to 1.00 The command sets the delay of the chip clock with a high resolution. Example: :SOUR:IS95:CLOC:DEL 0.75 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:IS95:POWer? The command queries the total power for the CDMA signal. Example: :SOUR:IS95:POW? [:SOURce]:IS95:POWer:ADJust The command modifies the power of each active code channel. This means that the total power is set equal to the power in the level display. The command triggers an action and hence has no *RST value assigned. Example: :SOUR:IS95:POW:ADJ [:SOURce]:IS95:MAPPing The command for storing and reading the complete channel assignments and settings are under this node. These mappings are not affected by *RST. [:SOURce]:IS95:MAPPing:PREDefined:CATalog? The command returns a list of all predefined mappings. Example: :SOUR:IS95:MAPP:PRED:CAT? [:SOURce]:IS95:MAPPing:PREDefined:LOAD ‘name’ The command selects one of the predefined channel configurations (c.f. Chapter 2). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:IS95:MAPP:SEL ’PILOT’ [:SOURce]:IS95:MAPPing:CATalog? The command returns an enumerated list of all user-defined mappings. Example: :SOUR:IS95:MAPP:CAT? Answer: 'test1','test2' 1125.5555.03 3.106 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) [:SOURce]:IS95:MAPPing:LOAD ‘name’ The command loads a user-defined channel assignment and setting (mapping). The name may have a maximum of 7 characters. This command triggers an action and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:IS95:MAPP:LOAD ’test’ [:SOURce]:IS95:MAPPing:STORe ‘name’ The command stores the current mapping under a name. The name may have a maximum of 7 characters. This command triggers an action and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:IS95:MAPP:STOR ’test’ [:SOURce]:IS95:MAPPing:DELete ‘name’ The command deletes the indicated mapping. This command triggers an action and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:IS95:MAPP:DEL ’test1’ [:SOURce]:IS95:CHANnel<0 to 63> The commands for specifying the channel configuration for the 18-channel Forward Link (channel 0 to 17) and 64-channel Forward Link (channel 0 to 63) are under this node. Channel 0 for which only the power can be set is the pilot channel. [:SOURce]:IS95:CHANnel<1 to 17>:WALShcode 0 to 63 This command assigns a Walsh code to a channel. This applies to FLINk18 only; for FLINk64, the Walsh code corresponding to its channel number is assigned to every channel. The command is not available in this case. Example: :SOUR:IS95:CHAN2:WALS 23 [:SOURce]:IS95:CHANnel<0 to 3>:POWer -30 dB to 0 dB This command determines the power of a channel. For Flink18 the power for channels 0, 1 and 2 can be set separately. The power setting for channel 3 is also valid for the subsequent channels. For Flink64 the power setting for channel 1 is valid for all subsequent channels (except for the pilot channel) Example: :SOUR:IS95:CHAN2:POW -22 DB [:SOURce]:IS95:CHANnel<1 to 63>:DATA ZERO | ONE | ALTernate | PRBS This command determines the data source of the channel. ZERO 0000..., sequence of zeros ONE 1111..., sequence of ones ALT 1010..., alternating sequence, starting with 1 PRBS Pseudo Random Bit sequence Example: :SOUR:IS95:CHAN2:DATA PRBS [:SOURce]:IS95:CHANnel<0 to 63>:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the channel on or off. Flink18: channels 0 to 8 are switched on and channels 9 to 17 are switched off. Flink64: all channels are switched on. Example: :SOUR:IS95:CHAN17:STAT ON *RST value: see text 1125.5555.03 3.107 E-9 SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) SMIQ [:SOURce]:IS95:RATE FULL | HALF The command sets the data rate for operating mode Reverse Link (IS95:MODE RLINK). Example: *RST value is FULL :SOUR:IS95:RATE HALF [:SOURce]:IS95:RANDomizer[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches the burst randomizer for operating mode Reverse Link (IS95:MODE RLINK) on or off. The bursts are distributed at pseudo random within a 20-ms frame. Example: :SOUR:IS95:RAND ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:IS95:DATA ZERO | ONE | ALTernate | PRBS | DLISt This command determines the data source for operating mode Reverse Link (IS95:MODE RLINK). ZERO ONE ALT PRBS DLISt 0000..., sequence of zeros 1111..., sequence of ones 1010..., alternating sequence, starting with 1 Pseudo Random Bit Sequence The data list selected with IS95:DLIS ‘name’ is used. Example: :SOUR:IS95:DATA ZERO *RST value is PRBS [:SOURce]:IS95:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list is used if DLISt is selected as the data source (IS95:DATA DLIS). Example: :SOUR:IS95:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:IS95:DLISt:CATalog? The command queries the available data lists. (Only query, no *RST value) Example: :SOUR:IS95:DLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:IS95:RLCoded:CTYPe TRAF14400 | TRAF7200 | TRAF3600 | TRAF1800 | ACC4800 | TRAF9600 | TRAF4800 | TRAF2400 | TRAF1200 The command defines the data rate and the channel type. It is only available with ‘IS95:MODE RLCoded’ selected. Example: :SOUR:IS95:RLC:CTYP TRAF1800 *RST value is TRAF14400 [:SOURce]:IS95:RLCoded:DATA PN9 | PN11| PN15 | PN 16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt The command selects the data source. PN.. represent the PRBS generators, DLIS the data list selected with the following command. The command is only available with ‘IS95:MODE RLCoded’ selected. Example: :SOUR:IS95:RLC:DATA DLIS *RST value is PN9 [:SOURce]:IS95:RLCoded:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list is used if DLISt is selected as the data source. The command is only available with ‘IS95:MODE RLCoded’ selected. Example: 1125.5555.03 :SOUR:IS95:RLC:DLIS ’test’ 3.108 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:IS95 Subsystem (Digital Standard IS-95 CDMA) [:SOURce]:IS95:RLCoded:FQINdicator ON | OFF The command switches the frame quality indicator (a CRC of the data) on or off. If the frame quality indicator is switched off, only zeros are transmitted. The command is only available with ‘IS95:MODE RLCoded’ selected. Example: :SOUR:IS95:RLC:FQIN OFF *RST value is ON [:SOURce]:IS95:RLCoded:CENCoder ON | OFF The command switches the convolutional encoder on or off. If the convolutional encoder is off, the required data rate is attained by repeating the symbols. The command is only available with ‘IS95:MODE RLCoded’ selected. Example: :SOUR:IS95:RLC:CENC OFF *RST value is ON [:SOURce]:IS95:RLCoded:BINTerleaver ON | OFF The command selects the block interleaver function. It is only available with ‘IS95:MODE RLCoded’ selected. Example: :SOUR:IS95:RLC:BINT OFF *RST value is ON [:SOURce]:IS95:RLCoded:EBIT 0 | 1 The command sets the value of the erasure bit. It is only available with ‘IS95:MODE RLCoded’ selected. Example: :SOUR:IS95:RLC:EBIT 0 *RST value is 1 1125.5555.03 3.109 E-9 SOURce:LIST Subsystem SMIQ 3.5.14.12 SOURce:LIST Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the LIST operating mode of the RF generator. The LIST mode is activated by command SOURce:FREQuency:MODE LIST. Processing the lists is controlled by the TRIGger:LIST subsystem. Each list consists of a FREQuency, POWer and DWELl content. The list contents must all be of the same length except for contents of length 1. This is interpreted as if the content had the same length as the other contents and all values were equal to the first value. After a list has been created and changed, command :LIST:LEARn has to be entered to have the settings transferred to the hardware. Note: SCPI designates the individual lists as segments. Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :LIST :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... :DELete 'Name of list' Query only :ALL :DWELl 1 ms to 1 s s 300 kHz to RFmax {, 300 kHz to RFmax } | block data Hz :FREE? :FREQuency Query only :POINts? RFmax: depends on model Query only :LEARn No query :MODE AUTO | STEP :POWer -144 to 16 dBm {, -144 to 16 dBm} | block data dBm :POINts? :SELect Query only 'Name of list' [:SOURce]:LIST:CATalog? The command requests a list of the lists available separated by commas. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:LIST:CAT? Answer: 'MYLIST', 'LIST1', 'LIST2' [:SOURce]:LIST:DELete 'Name of list' The command deletes the list indicated. *RST has no influence on data lists. Example: :SOUR:LIST:DEL 'LIST2' [:SOURce]:LIST:DELete:ALL The command deletes all lists. As a possibly selected list is deleted as well, the LIST mode must be switched off (SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW or SWEep). *RST has no influence on data lists. Example: :SOUR:LIST:DEL:ALL [:SOURce]:LIST:DWELl 1 ms to 1 s The command sets the time the instrument 'dwells' at this item. Example: :SOUR:LIST:DWEL 0.15 [:SOURce]:LIST:FREE? The command queries two values. The first one indicates the space still vacant for lists, the second one the space already occupied (in items). The command is a query and thus has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:LIST:FREE? Answer: 2400, 200 1125.5555.03 3.110 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:LIST Subsystem [:SOURce]:LIST:FREQuency 300 kHz to RFmax {, 300 kHz to RFmax} | block data (RFmax depending on model) The command fills the FREQuency part of the list selected with data. The data can either be indicated as a list of numbers (separated by commas) of arbitrary length or as binary block data. In the case of block data transmission, always 8 (4) bytes are interpreted as a floating-point number of double accuracy (cf. command FORMat :DATA). *RST does not influence data lists. Example: :SOUR:LIST:FREQ 1.4GHz, 1.3GHz, 1.2GHz,... [:SOURce]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts? The command queries the length (in items) of the FREQuency part of the list presently selected. The command is a query and thus has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:LIST:FREQ:POIN? Answer: 327 [:SOURce]:LIST:LEARn The command learns the list selected. I.e., it determines the hardware setting for the entire list. The data thus determined are stored together with the list. The command triggers an event and thus has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:LIST:LEAR Caution: This command has to be given after every creating and changing of a list. [:SOURce]:LIST:MODE AUTO | STEP The command indicates the mode in which the list is to be processed (by analogy with SOURce:SWEep:MODE). AUTO STEP Example: Each trigger event triggers a complete list run. Each trigger event triggers only one step in processing the list. :SOUR:LIST:MODE STEP *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:LIST:POWer -144 to 16 dBm {, -144 to 16 dBm} | block data The command fills the LEVel part of the RF list selected with data. The data can either be indicated as a list of numbers (separated by commas) of arbitrary length or as binary block data. As to the format of the data, cf. command :SOURce:LIST:FREQ. *RST does not influence data lists. Example: :SOUR:LIST:POW 0dBm, -2dBm, -2dBm, -3dBm,... [:SOURce]:LIST:POWer:POINts? The command queries the length (in items) of the LEVel part of the list presently selected. The command is a query and thus has no *RST value Example: :SOUR:LIST:POW:POIN? Answer: 32 [:SOURce]:LIST:SELect 'Name of list The command selects the list indicated. If there is no list of this name, a new list is created. The name may contain up to 8 letters. The command triggers an event and thus has no *RST value Example: :SOUR:LIST:SEL 'LIST1' 1125.5555.03 3.111 E-9 SOURce:MARKer Subsystem SMIQ 3.5.14.13 SOURce:MARKer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the marker generation with sweeps. The SMIQ has three markers each for frequency and level sweeps which are differentiated by a numeric suffix after MARKer. The settings for frequency sweep and level sweep marker are independent of each other. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :MARKer1|2|3|4 [:FSWeep] :AMPLitude ON | OFF :AOFF No query :FREQuency 300 kHz to RFmax [:STATe] ON | OFF Hz RFmax depending on model :PSWeep No query :AOFF :POWer [:STATe] :POLarity -144 to+16 dBm dBm ON | OFF NORMal | INVerted [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3|4[:FSWeep] The commands for the markers with frequency sweep are under this node. Keyword :FSWeep can be omitted, then the command conforms to SCPI regulations. [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3|4[:FSWeep]:AMPLitude ON | OFF The command specifies whether the marker influences the signal level. ON The output level is reduced by a constant value when the marker frequency is executed. OFF The output level remains unchanged. *RST value is OFF Example: :SOUR:MARK1:FSW:AMP ON [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3|4[:FSWeep]:AOFF Command (All markers off) switches off all frequency markers. This command triggers an event, thus it has no *RST value and no query form. Example: :SOUR:MARK:FSW:AOFF [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]:FREQuency 300 kHz to RFmax (RFmax depending on model) The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer to the frequency indicated. In this command, the OFFSet value of the subsystem (menu) FREQuency is considered as with input value MARKER in the SWEEP-FREQ menu. Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet = 0. The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Frequency Offset", as well): *RST value for MARK1: 100 MHz 300 kHz - OFFSet to RFmax - OFFSet MARK2: 200 MHz MARK3: 300 MHz MARK4: 400 MHz Example: :SOUR:MARK1:FSW:FREQ 30MHz 1125.5555.03 3.112 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:MARKer Subsystem [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3|4[:FSWeep][:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer on or off. Example: :SOUR:MARK1:FSW:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|34:PSWeep The commands for the markers with level sweep are under this node (Power sweep). The three markers are differentiated by a numeric suffix after MARKer. [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|34:PSWeep:AOFF The command switches all level markers off. This command is an event and thus has no *RST value and no query form. Example: :SOUR:MARK:PSW:AOFF [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|34:PSWeep:POWer -144 dBm to +16 dBm The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer to the level indicated. In this command, the OFFSet value of subsystem (menu) POWER (LEVEL) is considered in correspondence with input value MARKER in the SWEEP LEVEL menu. Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for SOURce:POWer:OFFSet = 0. The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Level Offset" as well): -144 dBm OFFSet to 16 dBm OFFSet *RST value for MARK1: 1 dBm MARK2: 2 dBm MARK3: 3 dBm MARK4: 4 dBm Example: :SOUR:MARK1:PSW:POW -2dBm [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:PSWeep[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer on or off. Example: :SOUR:MARK1:PSW:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:POLarity NORMal | INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the marker signal. NORMal When running through the marker condition, TTL level is applied at the marker output, otherwise 0 V. INVerted When running through the marker condition, 0 V is applied at the marker output, otherwise TTL level. *RST value is NORM Example: :SOUR:MARK:POL INV 1125.5555.03 3.113 E-9 SOURce:MODulation Subsystem SMIQ 3.5.14.14 SOURce:MODulation Subsystem Command [:SOURce] :MODulation [:ALL] :STATe Parameter Default unit Remark ON | OFF [:SOURce]:MODulation[:ALL]:STATe ON | OFF This command deactivates all types of modulation with OFF. All analog, vector, digital, digital standard and ARB modulations are thus set to OFF if they were switched on before. This command can be used before switching on a new type of modulation in order to avoid the error message "settings conflict" since only one type of modulation can be operated at the same time. The modulation used last is activated again with ON (same function as MOD ON/OFF key). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:MOD:STAT OFF 1125.5555.03 3.114 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:NADC Subsystem 3.5.14.15 SOURce:NADC Subsystem Note #H0 to #HF are characters which are entered in alphanumeric Hex form manually. SCPI (and IEEE 488.2) also accept the entry of non-decimal characters in octal and binary such as #H|h <0 to 9, A|a to F|f>, #Q|q <0 to 7> and #B|b <0|1>. The characters are always output in Hex format after a query. Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :NADC :STATe ON | OFF :STANdard - :SRATe 1kHz to 200 kHz No query Hz :FILTer :TYPE SCOSine | COSine | USER :SELect ‘name‘ :PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 :MODE LACP | LEVM :LDIStortion [:STATe] :SEQuence ON | OFF AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 :DELay 0 to 65535 :OUTPut[2] SLOT | FRAMe :DELay 0 to 971 :PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 :CLOCk :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :MODE BIT | SYMBol :DELay 0 to 1.0 no query :PRAMp :PRESet :TIME :DELay 0.25 to 16 -1,0 to +1,0 :SHAPe LINear | COSine :ROFFset -9 to +9 :FOFFset -9 to +9 :SLOT :ATTenuation dB 0 to 70 dB :LINK UP | DOWN :RCONfiguration AHALf | FULL1 | FULL2 | FULL3 | FULL12 | FULL13 | FULL23 | AFULl 1125.5555.03 3.115 E-9 SOURce:NADC Subsystem Command SMIQ Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :NADC :FLISt :PREDefined :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... :LOAD ‘name’ query only :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... :LOAD ‘name’ :STORe ‘name’ no query :DELete ‘name’ no query Þ name {,name}... query only query only :DLISt :CAtalog? i=[1],2 to 8 (Slot Selector) :SLOT :TYPE TCH | SHORt | ADATa :LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL :PRESet - no query [:SOURce] :SACChannel :DLISt :DATA :DLISt PN9 | PN11| PN15 | PN 16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa 'name' PN9 | PN11| PN15 | PN 16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa 'name' :SYNC #H0 to #HFFFFFFF (28 bit) :CDVCc #H1 to #HFFF ( 8 bit) :RSVD #H800 to #HFFF ( 12/11 bit) [:SOURce]:NADC:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the modulation on according to NADC standard. All other standards that might be switched on or digital modulation are automatically switched OFF. Example: :SOUR:NADC:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:NADC:STANdard The commands sets all modulation parameters to the values of the NADC standard. I.e., all values that have been selected by the :NADC:SLOT... commands described in the following are not valid. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:NADC:STAN [:SOURce]:NADC:SRATe 1kHz to 200 kHz The command sets the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:NADC:SRAT 192.1 kHz *RST value is 192 kHz [:SOURce]:NADC:FILTer The commands for selecting a filter are under this node. 1125.5555.03 3.116 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:NADC Subsystem [:SOURce]:NADC:FILTer:TYPE SCOSine | COSine | USER The command selects the type of filter. A filter list should be selected with :NADC:FILT:SEL 'name' for the filter type USER. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FILT:TYPE COS *RST value is SCOS [:SOURce]:NADC:FILTer:SELect 'name' The command selects a named filter list. The list is used only if a user-defined filter is selected with :NADC:FILT:TYPE USER. To generate lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SEL, to fill up lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FILT:SEL 'test' *RST value is NONE [:SOURce]:NADC:FILTer:PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 The command sets the filter parameter entry (Roll Off factor). Example: :SOUR:NADC:FILT:PAR 0.5 [:SOURce]:NADC:FILTer:MODE LACP | LEVM This command selects one of the "L"ow filter modes. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FILT:MODE LEVM [:SOURce]:NADC:LDIStortion[:STATe] ON | OFF The command sets the reduced level for the low-distortion mode. Example: :SOUR:NADC:LDIS ON [:SOURce]:NADC:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the sequence. AAUTo is ARMED AUTO ARETrigger is ARMED RETRIG Example: :SOUR:NADC:SEQ AAUT *RST value is 0.35 *RST value is LACP *RST value is OFF *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:NADC:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering is via IEC/IEEE bus or the Execute command in manual control. Example: :SOUR:NADC:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:NADC:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:NADC:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:NADC:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 65535 The command sets the trigger delay (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:NADC:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.117 E-9 SOURce:NADC Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:NADC:TRIGgerOUTPut[2]:DELay 0 to 971 The command determines the delay of the signal at trigger output 2 in comparison with the start of the frames/slots in number of symbols. Example: :SOUR:NADC:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 16 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:NADC:TRIGger:OUTPut[2]:PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 The command sets the repeat rate (in number of frames) of the signal at trigger output 2. Example: :SOUR:NADC:TRIG:OUTP2:PER 8 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:NADC:CLOCk The commands for setting the data clock are under this node. [:SOURce]:NADC:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the source for the DM data clock. INTernal The internal clock generator is used and output via the clock outputs of the serial and parallel interface. EXTernal The clock is externally fed in via the serial interface and output via the parallel interface. Example: :SOUR:NADC:CLOC:SOUR INT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:NADC:CLOCk:MODE BIT | SYMBol The command sets the clock mode for :NADC:CLOCk:SOURce EXTernal. BIT The external clock has to be a bit clock. SYMBol The external clock has to be a symbol clock. The bit and symbol clock only differ for this modulation, because it has more than two states, i.e. more than one bit is required to code each state. Example: :SOUR:NADC:CLOC:MODE BIT *RST value is SYMB [:SOURce]:NADC:CLOCk:DELay 0 to 1.0 The command sets the delay of the symbol clock (as a fraction of the length of a symbol). Example: :SOUR:NADC:CLOC:DEL 0.75 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:NADC:PRAMp The commands for the level control of the burst are under this node. [:SOURce]:NADC:PRAMp:PRESet This command sets the standard-stipulated values for the following commands of level control. It is an event and hence has no query and no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:NADC:PRAM:PRES [:SOURce]:NADC:PRAMp:TIME 0.25 to 16.0 The command sets the cutoff steepness (in symbol clocks). Example: :SOUR:NADC:PRAM:TIME 2.5 *RST value is 3 [:SOURce]:NADC:PRAMp:DELay -1.0 to + 1.0 The command defines the shift of the envelope characteristic to the modulated signal. A positive value causes a delay of the envelope. 1125.5555.03 3.118 E-9 SMIQ Example: SOURce:NADC Subsystem :SOUR:NADC:PRAM:DEL 0.2 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:NADC:PRAMp:SHAPe LINear | COSine The command selects the linear or cosine shape of the ramp-up and ramp-down (power burst). Example: :SOUR:NADC:PRAM:SHAP COS *RST value is COS [:SOURce]:NADC:PRAMp:ROFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the (‘R’ising) edge of a power burst to the beginning of the block. Example: :SOUR:NADC:PRAM:ROFF -3 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:NADC:PRAMp:FOFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the ('F'alling) edge of a power burst to the data block Example: :SOUR:NADC:PRAM:FOFF 4 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT:ATTenuation 0 to -70 dB The command determines the amount by which the power of the slots marked by :NADC:SLOT:LEVEL ATT is reduced in comparison with the normal output power (attribute to :LEVEL FULL). Example: :SOUR:NADC:SLOT:ATT 20 dB *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:NADC:LINK UP | DOWN The command determines the burst type which differs depending on the transmit direction. The structure of the frames is different and thus has an effect on the selection of possible :NADC:SLOT commands. This command is stored as a part of the :NADC:FLISt configurations described below. UP From mobile part to fixed part DOWN From fixed part to mobile part Example: :SOUR:NADC:LINK DOWN *RST value is DOWN [:SOURce]:NADC:RCONfiguration AHALf | FULL1 | FULL2 | FULL3 | FULL12 | FULL13 | FULL23 | AFUL This configuration setup determines how the FULL- and HALF-rate channels (slots) are distributed among the frames. This command is stored as a part of the :NADC:FLISt configurations described below. AHALf All Half FULL1 FULL (1 & 4) FULL2 FULL (2 & 5) FULL3 FULL (3 & 6) FULL12 FULL (1 & 4), (2 & 5) FULL13 FULL (1 & 3), (3 & 6) FULL23 FULL (2 & 5), (3 & 6) AFUL All Full Example: :SOUR:NADC:RCON FULL3 *RST value is AFUL [:SOURce]:NADC:FLISt The commands for storing and reading complete frames including their bursts (slots) are under this node. Predefined and user-generated frames have to be distinguished. 1125.5555.03 3.119 E-9 SOURce:NADC Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:NADC:FLISt:PREDefined:CATalog? The command returns a list of all predefined frames. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FLIS:PRED:CAT? [:SOURce]:NADC:FLISt:PREDefined:LOAD ‘name’ The command selects one of the predefined (fixed) frames (c.f. Chapter 2). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FLIS:PRED:LOAD ’test’ [:SOURce]:NADC:FLISt:CATalog? Þname, {name}... The command returns a list of all user-defined frames. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:NADC:FLISt:LOAD ‘name’ The command loads a user-defined frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FLIS:LOAD ’dn_tch’ [:SOURce]:NADC:FLISt:STORe ‘name’ The command stores the current frame under a name. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FLIS:STOR ’test’ [:SOURce]:NADC:FLISt:DELete ‘name’ The command deletes the indicated frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:NADC:FLIS:DEL ’test1’ [:SOURce]:NADC:DLISt:CATalog? The command returns an enumeration of all data lists. These data lists are selected by means of :NADC:SLOT:SACC:DLIS ‘name’ and...:DATA:DLIS ‘name’ and used if :NADC:SLOT:SACC DLISt and...:DATA DLISt are set. Example: :SOUR:NADC:DLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT The commands for setting the slot characteristics are under this node. Since a frame contains 6 slots, suffix ‘i’ is used to select the slot to be changed. i = [1] | 2 | 3 | 3 | 5 | 6 1125.5555.03 3.120 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:NADC Subsystem [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT:TYPE TCH | SHORt | ADATa The command selects the type of burst (slot) defined in the standard. TCH Normal communication channel with the fields defined by the standard. ADATa All data (without predefined SYNC, SACCh, CDVCc and RSVD fields) SHORt Only used for uplink to set up TCH. Example: :SOUR:NADC:SLOT2:TYPE TCH *RST value is TCH [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT:LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL The command determines the power stage of the slot. OFF The slot is inactive. For UPLINK, the source is always at full power. Therefore, in the case of a DOWNLINK TCH burst, only a series of 1's is sent instead of the data. ATT The power is reduced by the amount defined by :NADC:SLOT:ATT For a DOWNLINK TCH burst this setting is not valid. FULL Full power (predefined by level setting) Example: :SOUR:NADC:SLOT2:LEV ATT *RST value is FULL [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT:PRESet The command sets all the parameters of the slot to the values defined by the standard as a function of the type set above and the direction (LINK). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:NADC:SLOT2:PRES [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT[:SOURce] The commands for determining the source for the data contents are under this node. The source is either a PRBS generator (with different sequence length), the data input SER DATA or a data list. Selection of data source for the data fields of the burst: PN9 to 23 PRBS generator has been selected DLISt Data of a programmable data list SDATa Data from data input SER DATA [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT[:SOURce]:SACChannel PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the data words. Example: :NADC:SLOT3:SACC PN15 *RST value is PN9 [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT[:SOURce]:SACChannel:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the :NADC:SLOT:SACC DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :NADC:SLOT:SACC:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT[:SOURce]:DATA PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the data words. Example: :SOUR:NADC:SLOT2:DATA DLIS *RST value is PN9 1125.5555.03 3.121 E-9 SOURce:NADC Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT[:SOURce]:DATA:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the :NADC:SLOT:DATA DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :NADC:SLOT:DATA:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT:SYNC #H0 to #HFFFFFFF (28 bit) The command changes the sync word predefined by the standard. Example: :SOUR:NADC:SLOT2:SYNC #HC7E3C0C *RST value depends on SLOT:TYPE [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT:CDVCc #H1 to #HFFF (8 bit) This command sets the Coded Digital Verification Color Code. Example: :SOUR:NADC:SLOT2:CDVCc #H3F *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:NADC:SLOT:RSVD #H800 to #HFFF (12/11 bit) The command sets the reserved word (only for TCH and LINK DOWN). The MSBit is normally set. Example: :SOUR:NADC:SLOT2:RSVD #H80F *RST value is #H800 1125.5555.03 3.122 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:NOISe Subsystem 3.5.14.16 SOURce:NOISe Subsystem Subsystem NOISe comprises all commands for setting the noise generator. The NDSim subsystem under CALibrate is available for the offset calibration. In the DIAGnostic subsystem the noise or carrier signal can be switched off for C/N measurements (refer to chapter Performance Test in the Operating Manual). Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] Not-SCPI :NOISe [:STATe] ON | OFF :SNRatio -5.0 to 30.0 dB :BANDwidth|BWIDth 10k to 10M Hz [:SOURce]:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF This command switches White Gaussian Noise on or off. Example: :SOUR:NOIS ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:NOISe:SNRatio -5.0 to 30.0 dB This command sets the S/N ratio. Setting range is -5 dB to +30 dB, resolution is 0.1 dB. Example: :SOUR:NOIS:SNR 10 DB *RST value is 0 dB [:SOURce]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth 10000 to 10000000 Hz This command sets the noise bandwidth. Setting range is 10 kHz to 10 MHz. Example: :SOUR:NOIS:BAND 1.23 MHZ *RST value is 10 kHz 1125.5555.03 3.123 E-9 SOURce:PDC Subsystem SMIQ 3.5.14.17 SOURce:PDC Subsystem Note: #H0 to #HF are characters which are entered in alphanumeric Hex form manually. SCPI (and IEEE 488.2) also accept the entry of non-numeric characters in octal and binary such as #H|h <0 to 9, A|a to F|f>, #Q|q <0 to 7> and #B|b <0|1>. The characters are always output in Hex format after a query. Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :PDC ON | OFF :STATe :STANdard :SRATe Hz 1kHz to 200 kHz :FILTer :TYPE SCOSine | COSine | USER :SELect ‘name‘ :PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 :MODE LACP | LEVM :LDIStortion [:STATe] :SEQuence ON | OFF AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 :DELay 0 to 65535 :OUTPut[2] :DELay 0 to 839 :PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 :CLOCk :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :MODE BIT | SYMBol :DELay 0 to 1.0 :PRAMp :PRES no query :TIME 0.25 to 16 :DELay -1.o to 1.0 :SHAPe LINear | COSine :ROFFset -9 to +9 :FOFFset :SLOT -9 to +9 :ATTenuation :LINK :RCONfiguration 1125.5555.03 dB 0 to 70 dB UP | DOWN AHALf | FULL0 | FULL1 | FULL2 | FULL10 | FULL20 | FULL21 | AFUL 3.124 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PDC Subsystem Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :PDC :FLISt :PREDefined query only :CATalog? :LOAD Þ name {,name}... query only :CATalog? ‘name’ :LOAD ‘name’ :STORe ‘name’ no query :DELete ‘name’ no query ‘name‘ :DLISt query only :CATalog? :SLOT :TYPE TCH | SYNC | VOX | ADATa :LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL No query :PRESet :SCRamble :STATe ON | OFF :STARt #H1 to #H1FF (9 bits) :SFRame :STATe ON | OFF :RCHPosition 1 to 17 [:SOURce] :DATA :DLISt :SACChannel :DLISt :RCHannel :DLISt PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa 'name' PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa 'name' PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa 'name' PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa :SI :DLISt 'name' :PREamble #H0 to #HFF... (2/6/48/102 bits) :SYNC #H0 to #HFF... (20/32 bits) :SYNC2 #H0 to #HFF... (20/32 bits) :CCODe #H0 to #HFF (8 bits) :POSTamble #H0 to #H3FF... (78 bits) :SF 0|1 [:SOURce]:PDC:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the modulation on or off according to PDC standard. All other standards that might be switched on or digital modulation are automatically switched OFF. Example: :SOUR:PDC:STAT ON *RST value is OFF 1125.5555.03 3.125 E-9 SOURce:PDC Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:PDC:STANdard The commands sets all modulation parameters to the values of the PDC standard. I.e., all values that have been selected by the :PDC:SLOT... commands described in the following are not valid. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:PDC:STAN [:SOURce]:PDC:SRATe 1kHz to 200 kHz The command sets the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SRAT 21.1 kHz *RST value is 21.0 kHz [:SOURce]:PDC:FILTer The commands for selecting a filter are under this node. [:SOURce]:PDC:FILTer:TYPE SCOSine | COSine | USER The command selects the type of filter. A filter list should be selected with :PDC:FILT:SEL 'name' for the filter type USER. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FILT:TYPE COS *RST value is SCOS [:SOURce]:PDC:FILTer:SELect 'name' The command selects a named filter list. The list is used only if a user-defined filter is selected with :PDC:FILT:TYPE USER. To generate lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SEL, to fill up lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FILT:SEL 'test' *RST value is NONE [:SOURce]:PDC:FILTer:PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 The command sets the filter parameter entry (Roll Off factor). Example: :SOUR:PDC:FILT:PAR 0.51 [:SOURce]:PDC:FILTer:MODE LACP | LEVM This command selects one of the "L"ow filter modes. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FILT:MODE LEVM *RST value is 0.5 *RST value is LACP [:SOURce]:PDC:LDIStortion[:STATe] ON | OFF The command sets the reduced level for the low-distortion mode. Example: :SOUR:PDC:LDIS ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:PDC:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the sequence. AAUTo is ARMED AUTO ARETrigger is ARMED RETRIG Example: :SOUR:PDC:SEQ AAUT *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:PDC:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering is via IEC/IEEE bus or the Execute command in manual control. Example: :SOUR:PDC:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT 1125.5555.03 3.126 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PDC Subsystem [:SOURce]:PDC:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:PDC:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PDC:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 65535 The command sets the trigger delay (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:PDC:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PDC:TRIGgerOUTPut[2]:DELay 0 to 839 The command determines the delay of the signal at trigger output 2 in comparison with the start of the frames/slots in number of symbols. Example: :SOUR:PDC:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 16 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PDC:TRIGger:OUTPut[2]:PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 The command sets the repeat rate (in number of frames) of the signal at trigger output 2. Example: :SOUR:PDC:TRIG:OUTP2:PER 8 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:PDC:CLOCk The commands for setting the data clock are under this node. [:SOURce]:PDC:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the source for the DM data clock. INTernal The internal clock generator is used and output via the clock outputs of the serial and parallel interface. EXTernal The clock is externally fed in via the serial interface and output via the parallel interface. Example: :SOUR:PDC:CLOC:SOUR INT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:PDC:CLOCk:MODE BIT | SYMBol The command sets the clock mode for :PDC:CLOCk:SOURce EXTernal. BIT The external clock has to be a bit clock. SYMBol The external clock has to be a symbol clock. The bit and symbol clock only differ for modulations with more than two states, i.e. modulations for which more than one bit is required to code each state. Example: :SOUR:PDC:CLOC:MODE BIT *RST value is SYMB [:SOURce]:PDC:CLOCk:DELay 0 to 1.0 The command sets the delay of the symbol clock (as a fraction of the length of a symbol). Example: :SOUR:PDC:CLOC:DEL 0.75 *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.127 E-9 SOURce:PDC Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:PDC:PRAMp The commands for the level control of the burst are under this node. [:SOURce]:PDC:PRAMp:PRESet This command sets the standard-stipulated values for the following commands of level control. It is an event and hence has no query and no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PDC:PRAM:PRES [:SOURce]:PDC:PRAMp:TIME 0.25 to 16.0 The command sets the cutoff steepness (in symbol clocks). Example: :SOUR:PDC:PRAM:TIME 2.5 *RST value is 2 [:SOURce]:PDC:PRAMp:DELay -1.0 to + 1.0 The command defines the shift of the envelope characteristic to the modulated signal. A positive value causes a delay of the envelope. Example: :SOUR:PDC:PRAM:DEL 0.2 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PDC:PRAMp:SHAPe LINear | COSine The command selects the linear or cosine shape of the ramp-up and ramp-down (power burst). Example: :SOUR:PDC:PRAM:SHAP COS *RST value is COS [:SOURce]:PDC:PRAMp:ROFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the (‘R’ising) edge of a power burst to the beginning of the block. Example: :SOUR:PDC:PRAM:ROFF -3 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PDC:PRAMp:FOFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the ('F'alling) edge of a power burst to the data block Example: :SOUR:PDC:PRAM:FOFF 4 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB The command determines the amount by which the power of the slots marked by :PDC:SLOT:LEVel ATT is reduced in comparison with the normal output power (Attribut to :LEVel FULL). Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT:ATT 20 dB *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PDC:LINK UP | DOWN The command determines the burst type which differs depending on the transmit direction. The structure of the frames is different and thus has an effect on the selection of possible :PDC:SLOT commands. This command is stored as a part of the :PDC:FLISt configurations (see below). UP From mobile part to fixed part DOWN From fixed part to mobile part Example: :SOUR:PDC:LINK DOWN *RST value is DOWN 1125.5555.03 3.128 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PDC Subsystem [:SOURce]:PDC:RCONfiguration AHALf | FULL1 | FULL2 | FULL3 | FULL12 | FULL13 | FULL23 | AFUL This configuration setup determines how the FULL- and HALF-rate channels (slots) are distributed among the frames. This command is stored as a part of the :PDC:FLISt configurations (see below). AHALf All Half FULL0 FULL (0 & 3) FULL1 FULL (1 & 4) FULL2 FULL (2 & 5) FULL10 FULL (1 & 4), (0 & 3) FULL20 FULL (2 & 5), (0 & 3) FULL21 FULL (2 & 5), (1 & 4) AFUL All Full Example: :SOUR:PDC:RCON FULL0 *RST value is AFUL [:SOURce]:PDC:FLISt The commands for storing and reading complete frames including their bursts (slots) are under this node. Predefined and user-generated frames have to be distinguished. [:SOURce]:PDC:FLISt:PREDefined:CATalog? The command returns a list of all predefined frames. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FLIS:PRED:CAT? [:SOURce]:PDC:FLISt:PREDefined:LOAD ‘name’ The command selects one of the predefined (fixed) frames (c.f. Chapter 2) . This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FLIS:PRED:LOAD ’dn_tch’ [:SOURce]:PDC:FLISt:CATalog? The command returns a list of all user-defined frames. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:PDC:FLISt:LOAD ‘name’ The command loads a user-defined frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FLIS:LOAD ’test’ [:SOURce]:PDC:FLISt:STORe ‘name’ The command stores the current frame under a name. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FLIS:STOR ’test’ [:SOURce]:PDC:FLISt:DELete ‘name’ The command deletes the indicated frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:PDC:FLIS:DEL ’test1’ 1125.5555.03 3.129 E-9 SOURce:PDC Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:PDC:DLISt:CATalog? The command returns an enumeration of all data lists. These data lists are selected by means of :PDC:SLOT:SACC:DLIS, ..:RCH:DLIS, ...SI:DLIS, or ...:DATA:DLIS ‘name’ and used if :PDC:SLOT:SACC, ...RCH, SI, or ...:DATA DLISt are set. Example: :SOUR:PDC:DLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT The commands for setting the slot characteristics are under this node. Since a frame contains 8 slots, suffix ‘i’ is used to select the slot to be changed. i = 0 | [1] | 2 | 3 | 3 | 5 | 6 | 7 [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:TYPE TCH | SYNC | VOX | ADATa The command selects the type of burst (slot) defined in the standard. ADATa is All Data Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:TYPE TCH *RST value is TCH [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL The command determines the power stage of the slot. OFF The slot is inactive For UPLINK, the source is always at full power. Therefore, in the case of an DOWNLINK TCH burst, only a series of 1's is sent instead of the data. ATT The power is reduced by the amount defined by :PDC:SLOT:ATT For an DOWNLINK TCH burst this setting is not valid. FULL Full power (predefined by level setting) Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:LEV ATT *RST value is FULL [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:PRESet The command sets all the parameters of the slot to the values defined by the standard as a function of the type set above. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:PRES [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:SCRamble The commands for setting the scramble method are under this node. [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:SCRamble:STATe ON | OFF The command switches scrambling for data fields DATA, SI and SACCH on or off. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:SCR:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:SCRamble:STARt #H1 to #H1FF (9 bits) The command sets the start value for the scramble sequence. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:SCR:STAR #H12 1125.5555.03 3.130 *RST value is 1 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PDC Subsystem [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:SFRame:STATe ON | OFF This command switches the superframe on or off. When switched on, RCD data will be inserted instead of SACCH data in some slots and SYNC2 will be used instead of SYNC in the first slot of the superframe. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:SFR:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:SFRame:RCHPosition 1 to 17 The command determines the position of the second RCH. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:SFR:RCHP 10 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce] The commands for determining the source for the data contents are under this node. The source is either a PRBS generator (with different sequence length), the data input SER DATA or a data list. Selection of data source for the data fields of the burst: PN9 to 23 PRBS generator has been selected DLISt Data from a programmable data list SDATa Data from data input SER DATA [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce]:DATA PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the data words. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT3:DATA PN15 *RST value is PN9 [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce]:DATA:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the :PDC:SLOT:DATA DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT:DATA:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce]:SACChannel PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the slow associated control channel (for :SLOT:TYPE TCH... and VOX). Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT3:SACC PN15 *RST value is PN9 [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce]:SACChannel:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the:SOUR::PDC:SOUR:SLOT:SACC DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT:SACC:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce]:RCHannel PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the housekeeping channel (for :SLOT:FRAMe:STATe ON). Example: 1125.5555.03 :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:RCH DLIS 3.131 *RST value is PN9 E-9 SOURce:PDC Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce]:RCHannel:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the :SOUR:PDC:SLOT:RCH DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :PDC:SLOT:RCH:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce]:SI PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the sync information field (for :SLOT:TYPE SYNC). Example: *RST value is PN9 :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:SI DLIS [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT[:SOURce]:SI:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the :SOUR:PDC:SLOT:SI DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT:SI:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:PREamble #H0 to #H... (2/6/48/102 bits) The command sets the value of the ‘P’ bits. The length and the *RST value depend on the slot type and the link direction: :SLOT:TYPE TCH SYNC VOX TCH SYNC Example: :LINK UP UP UP DOWN DOWN Length (bits) 2 48 6 2 102 *RST value. 2 9999 9999 9999 26 2 26 6666 6666 6666 6666 6666 6666 :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:PRE #H1 For *RST value see above [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:SYNC #H0 to #HFFFFF/FFFFFFFF (20/32 bits) The command sets the value of the sync word. The length 32bit is only available for SLOT:TYPE SYNC. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:SYNC #H1A *RST value depends on SLOT [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:SYNC2 #H0 to #HFF... (20/32 bits) The command sets the value for the sync word in the superframe (only available for :PDC:SFRA:STAT ON). Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:SYNC2 #H1AB [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:CCODe #H0 to #HFF (8 bits) The command sets the value for the color code. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:CCOD #H1F *RST value is 0 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:POSTamble #H0 to 3FF... (78 bits) The command sets the value for postamble (only valid for SLOT:TYP SYNC and LINK DOWN). Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:POST #HF2 [:SOURce]:PDC:SLOT:SF 0 | 1 The command sets the state of the steal flag. Example: :SOUR:PDC:SLOT2:SF 1 1125.5555.03 3.132 *RST value is 2666 6666 6666 6666 6666 *RST value is 0 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PHASe Subsystem 3.5.14.18 SOURce:PHASe Subsystem Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :PHASe [:ADJust] -360 deg to +360 deg rad :REFerence No query [:SOURce]:PHASe[:ADJust] -360 deg to +360 deg The command indicates the phase between output signal and reference oscillator signal. This setting is only accepted using SOURce:PHASe:REFerence (cf. below). An indication in RADian is possible. Example: :SOUR:PHAS:ADJ 2DEG *RST value is 0.0 DEG :SOUR:PHAS:ADJ 0.1RAD [:SOURce]:PHASe:REFerence The command accepts the phase set using SOURce:PHASe:ADJust as a new reference phase. The command has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PHAS:REF 1125.5555.03 3.133 E-9 SOURce:PHS Subsystem SMIQ 3.5.14.19 SOURce:PHS Subsystem Note #H0 to #HF are characters which are entered in alphanumeric Hex form manually. SCPI (and IEEE 488.2) also accept the entry of non-decimal characters in octal and binary such as #H|h <0 to 9, A|a to F|f>, #Q|q <0 to 7> and #B|b <0|1>. The characters are always output in Hex format after a query. Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :PHS ON | OFF :STATe :STANdard :SRATe Hz 1kHz to 200 kHz :FILTer :TYPE SCOSine | COSine | USER :SELect ‘name‘ :PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 :MODE LACP | LEVM :LDIStortion [:STATe] :SEQuence ON | OFF AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 :DELay 0 to 65535 :OUTPut[2] :DELay 0 to 959 :PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 :CLOCk :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal :MODE BIT | SYMBol | SBIT :DELay 0 to 1.0 :PRAMp No query :PRESet :TIME 0.25 to 16 :DELay 1.0 to +1.0 :SHAPe LINear | COSine :ROFFset -9 to +9 :FOFFset -9 to +9 :SLOT :ATTenuation DB 0 to 70 dB :FLISt :PREDefined :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... :LOAD ‘name’ query only :CATalog? Þ name {,name}... :LOAD ‘name’ :STORe ‘name’ no query :DELete ‘name’ no query 1125.5555.03 3.134 query only E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PHS Subsystem Command Parameter Default unit Remark [:SOURce] :PHS :DLISt :CATalog? Þ name {,name}.. query only :SLOT :TYPE TCHFull | TCHHalf | SYNC | VOX | ADATa :LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL :PRESet - No query :SCRamble :STATe ON | OFF :CODE #H0 to #H3FF (10 bit) :ENCRyption :STATe ON | OFF :KEY #H0 to #HFFFF (16 bits) :UWORd #H0 to #HFFFFFFFF (16 o r 32 bits) :CSID #H0 to #H3FFFFFFFFFF (42 bits) :PSID #H0 to #HFFFFFFFF (28 bits) :IDLe #H0 to #H3FFFFFFFF (34 bits) [:SOURce] :SACChannel :DLISt :TCHannel :DLISt PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN 16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa 'name' PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN 16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa 'name' [:SOURce]:PHS:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the modulation on according to PHS standard. All other standards that might be switched on or digital modulation are automatically switched OFF. Example: :SOUR:PHS:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:PHS:STANdard The commands sets all modulation parameters to the values of the PHS standard. I.e., all values that have been selected by the :PHS:SLOT... commands described in the following are not valid. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:PHS:STAN [:SOURce]:PHS:SRATe 1kHz to 200 kHz The command sets the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:PHS:SRAT 192.1 kHz *RST value is 192 kHz [:SOURce]:PHS:FILTer The commands for selecting a filter are under this node. [:SOURce]:PHS:FILTer:TYPE SCOSine | COSine | USER The command selects the type of filter. A filter list should be selected with :PHS:FILT:SEL 'name' for the filter type USER. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FILT:TYPE COS *RST value is SCOS 1125.5555.03 3.135 E-9 SOURce:PHS Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:PHS:FILTer:SELect 'name' The command selects a named filter list. The list is used only if a user-defined filter is selected with :PHS:FILT:TYPE USER. To generate lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SEL, to fill up lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FILT:SEL 'test' *RST value is NONE [:SOURce]:PHS:FILTer:PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 The command sets the filter parameter entry (Roll Off factor). Example: :SOUR:PHS:FILT:PAR 0.5 [:SOURce]:PHS:FILTer:MODE LACP | LEVM This command selects one of the "L"ow filter modes. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FILT:MODE LEVM *RST value is 0. 5 *RST value is LACP [:SOURce]:PHS:LDIStortion[:STATe] ON | OFF The command sets the reduced level for the low-distortion mode. Example: :SOUR:PHS:LDIS ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:PHS:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the sequence. AAUTo is ARMED AUTO ARETrigger is ARMED RETRIG Example: :SOUR:PHS:SEQ AAUT *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:PHS:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering is via IEC/IEEE bus or the Execute command in manual control. Example: :SOUR:PHS:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:PHS:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67.1E6 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:PHS:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 65535 The command sets the trigger delay (in number of symbols). Example: :SOUR:PHS:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:TRIGgerOUTPut[1]:DELay 0 to 959 The command determines the delay of the signal at trigger output 2 in comparison with the start of the frames/slots in number of symbols. Example: :SOUR:PHS:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 16 *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.136 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PHS Subsystem [:SOURce]:PHS:TRIGger:OUTPut[2]:PERiod 1 to 67.1E6 The command sets the repeat rate (in number of frames) of the signal at trigger output 2. Example: :SOUR:PHS:TRIG:OUTP:PER 8 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:PHS:CLOCk The commands for setting the data clock are under this node. [:SOURce]:PHS:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the source for the DM data clock. INTernal The internal clock generator is used and output via the clock outputs of the serial and parallel interface. EXTernal The clock is externally fed in via the serial interface and output via the parallel interface. Example: :SOUR:PHS:CLOC:SOUR INT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:PHS:CLOCk:MODE BIT | SYMBol The command sets the clock mode for :PHS:CLOCk:SOURce EXTernal. BIT The external clock has to be a bit clock. SYMBol The external clock has to be a symbol clock. The bit and symbol clock only differ for modulations with more than two states, i.e. modulations for which more than one bit is required to code each state. Example: :SOUR:PHS:CLOC:MODE BIT *RST value is SYMB [:SOURce]:PHS:CLOCk:DELay 0 to 1.0 The command sets the delay of the symbol clock (as a fraction of the length of a symbol). Example: :SOUR:PHS:CLOC:DEL 0.75 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:PRAMp The commands for the level control of the burst are under this node. [:SOURce]:PHS:PRAMp:PRESet This command sets the standard-stipulated values for the following commands of level control. It is an event and hence has no query and no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PHS:PRAM:PRES [:SOURce]:PHS:PRAMp:TIME 0.25 to 16.0 The command sets the cutoff steepness (in symbol clocks). Example: :SOUR:PHS:PRAM:TIME 2.5 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:PRAMp:DELay -1.0 to + 1.0 The command defines the shift of the envelope characteristic to the modulated signal. A positive value causes a delay of the envelope. Example: :SOUR:PHS:PRAM:DEL 0.2 *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.137 E-9 SOURce:PHS Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:PHS:PRAMp:SHAPe LINear | COSine The command selects the linear or cosine shape of the ramp-up and ramp-down (power burst). Example: :SOUR:PHS:PRAM:SHAP COS *RST value is LIN [:SOURce]:PHS:PRAMp:ROFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the (‘R’ising) edge of a power burst to the beginning of the slot. Example: :SOUR:PHS:PRAM:ROFF -3 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:PRAMp:FOFFset -9 to +9 The command determines the timing of the ('F'alling) edge of a power burst to the data block Example: :SOUR:PHS:PRAM:FOFF 4 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB The command determines the amount by which the power of the slots marked by :PHS:SLOT:LEVel ATT is reduced in comparison with the normal output power (Attribut to :LEVel FULL). Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT:ATT 20 dB *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:FLISt The commands for storing and reading complete frames including their bursts (slots) are under this node. Predefined and user-generated frames have to be distinguished. [:SOURce]:PHS:FLISt:PREDefined:CATalog? The command returns a list of all predefined frames. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FLIS:PRED:CAT? [:SOURce]:PHS:FLISt:PREDefined:LOAD ‘name’ The command selects one of the predefined (fixed) frames (c.f. Chapter 2). This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FLIS:PRED:LOAD ’test’ *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:FLISt:CATalog? The command returns a list of all user-defined frames. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:PHS:FLISt:LOAD ‘name’ The command loads a user-defined frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FLIS:LOAD ’test’ [:SOURce]:PHS:FLISt:STORe ‘name’ The command stores the current frame under a name. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FLIS:STOR ’test’ 1125.5555.03 3.138 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PHS Subsystem [:SOURce]:PHS:FLISt:DELete ‘name’ The command deletes the indicated frame. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:PHS:FLIS:DEL ’test1’ [:SOURce]:PHS:DLISt:CATalog? The command returns an enumeration of all data lists. These data lists are selected by means of :PHS:SLOT:SACC:DLIS ‘name’ and...:TCH:DLIS ‘name’ and used if :PHS:SLOT:SACC DLISt and...:TCH DLISt are set. Example: :SOUR:PHS:DLIS:CAT? [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT The commands for setting the slot characteristics are under this node. Since a frame contains 8 slots, suffix ‘i’ is used to select the slot to be changed. i = [1] | 2 | 3 | 3 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:TYPE TCHFull | TCHHalf | SYNC | VOX | ADATa The command selects the type of burst (slot) defined in the standard. ADATa All Data Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:TYPE TCHH Slot1: *RST value is SYNC Slot2 to 8: *RST value is TCHF [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:LEVel OFF | ATT | FULL The command determines the power stage of the slot. OFF The slot is inactive For UPLINK, the source is always at full power. Therefore, in the case of an DOWNLINK TCH burst, only a series of 1's is sent instead of the data. ATT The power is reduced by the amount defined by :PHS:SLOT:ATT For an DOWNLINK TCH burst this setting is not valid. FULL Full power (predefined by level setting) Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:LEV ATT slot1: *RST value is FULL slot2 to slot8: *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:PRESet The command sets all the parameters of the slot to the values defined by the standard as a function of the type set above. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:PRES [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:SCRamble The commands for setting the scramble method are under this node. [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:SCRamble:STATe ON | OFF The command switches scrambling on or off. Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:SCR:STAT ON 1125.5555.03 3.139 *RST value is OFF E-9 SOURce:PHS Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:SCRamble:CODE #H0 to #H3FF The command sets the 10-bit scramble value. Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:SCR:CODE #H123 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:ENCRyption The commands to determine encryption are under this node. [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:ENCRyption:STATe ON | OFF This command defines whether or not the data are to be encrypted according to the predefined method. Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:ENCR:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:ENCRyption:KEY #H0 to #HFFFF The command enters the 16-bit code for encryption or decryption . Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:KEY #H1234 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:UWORd #H0 to #HFFFFFFFF The command enters the 16/32-bit synchronization value (unique word). The number of bits depends on the type of slot. *RST value depends on SLOT:TYPE Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:UWOR #HA1B2C3D4 [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:CSID #H0 to #H3FFFFFFFFFF The command enters the 42-bit cell station ID code . Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:CSID #H12345FEDCBA [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:PSID #H0 to #HFFFFFFF The command enters the 28-bit personal station ID code. Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:PSID #H1234567 [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT:IDLe #H0 to #HFFFFFFF The command enters the 24-bit Idle bit. Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:PSID #H1234567 [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT[:SOURce] The commands for determining the source for the data contents are under this node. The source is either a PRBS generator (with different sequence length) or a data list. Selection of data source for the data fields of the burst: PN9 to 23 PRBS generator has been selected DLISt Data of a programmable data list SDATa Data from data input SER DATA [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT[:SOURce]:SACChannel PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the slow associated control channel (for :SLOT:TYPE TCH... and VOX). Example: 1125.5555.03 :SOUR:PHS:SLOT3:SACC PN15 3.140 *RST value is PN9 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PHS Subsystem [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT[:SOURce]:SACChannel:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the :PHS:SLOT:SACC DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :PHS:SLOT:SACC:DLIS ’test’ [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT[:SOURce]:TCHannel PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt | SDATa The command determines the data source for the traffic channel (for :SLOT:TYPE TCH... and VOX). Example: :SOUR:PHS:SLOT2:TCH PN9 *RST value is PN9 [:SOURce]:PHS:SLOT[:SOURce]:TCHannel:DLISt ‘name’ The command selects a data list. This list will not be used unless it is set as a data source by means of the :PHS:SLOT:TCH DLIS command. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value. Example: :PHS:SLOT:TCH:DLIS ’test’ 1125.5555.03 3.141 E-9 SOURce:PM Subsystem SMIQ 3.5.14.20 SOURce:PM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the phase modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal. The SMIQ can be equipped with two independent phase modulators (option SM-B5). They are differentiated by a suffix after PM. SOURce:PM1 SOURce:PM2 Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] Option SM-B5 :PM1|2 -360 deg to +360 deg [:DEViation] rad :EXTernal1|2 :COUPling AC | DC :INTernal :FREQuency 0.1Hz to 1 MHz :SOURce INT | EXT1 | EXT2 :STATe ON | OFF Hz [:SOURce]:PM1|2[:DEViation] -360 to +360 deg The command sets the modulation depth in Radian. DEGree are accepted. *RST value is 1 rad Example: SOUR:PM:DEV 20DEGR [:SOURce]:PM1|2:EXTernal1|2 The commands to check the external input of the PM modulators are under this node. The settings under EXTernal for modulations AM, FM and PM are independent of each other. The settings are always related to the socket determined by the suffix after EXTernal. The suffix after PM is ignored then. With the following commands, e.g., the settings are both related to socket EXT2: :SOUR:PM1:EXT2:COUP AC :SOUR:PM2:EXT2:COUP AC A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1. [:SOURce]:PM1|2:EXTernal1|2:COUPling AC | DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external PM input. AC The d.c. voltage content is separated from the modulation signal. DC The modulation signal is not changed. Example: :SOUR:PM:COUP DC *RST value is AC [:SOURce]:PM1|2:INTernal The settings for the internal PM generators are effected under this node. For PM1, this is always LF generator 1, for PM2, always LF generator 2. Here the same hardware is set for FM1, PM1, AM::INT1 as well as SOURce0, for FM2, PM2 and AM:INT2 and SOURce2 as well. This means that, e.g., the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect: SOUR:AM:INT2:FREQ SOUR:FM2:INT:FREQ SOUR:PM2:INT:FREQ SOUR2:FREQ:CW 1125.5555.03 3.142 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PM Subsystem [:SOURce]:PM1|2:INTernal:FREQuency 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency. Example: :SOUR:PM:INT:FREQ 10kHz *RST value is 1 kHz [:SOURce]:PM1|2:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 The command selects the modulation source. A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1. For PM1 the LF generator is INTernal. For PM2, only the external sources can be used (not the internal LF generator). The external and the internal modulation source can be indicated at the same time (see example) *RST value for PM1: INT Example: :SOUR:PM:SOUR INT; PM2:SOUR EXT2 for PM2:EXT2 [:SOURce]:PM1|2:STATe ON | OFF The command switches the phase modulation selected by the numeric suffix with PM on or off. Example: :SOUR:PM1:STAT OFF *RST value is OFF 1125.5555.03 3.143 E-9 SOURce:POWer Subsystem SMIQ 3.5.14.21 SOURce:POWer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the output level, the level control and the level correction of the RF signal. Other units can be used instead of dBm: – by indication directly after the numeric value (Example :POW 0.5V), – by altering the DEFault unit in the UNIT system (see Command :UNIT:POWER) Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :POWer :ALC [:STATe] ON | OFF | AUTO :SEARch ON | OFF | ONCE :TABLe query only [:MEASure]? [:LEVel] [:IMMediate] [:AMPLitude] -144 to +16 dBm dBm :OFFSet -100 to +100 dB dB :RCL INCLude | EXCLude :LIMit -144 to +16 dBm dBm :MANual -144 to +16 dBm dBm :MODE FIXed | SWEep | LIST [:AMPLitude] :PEP? :STARt -144 to +16 dBm dBm :STOP -144 to +16 dBm dBm 0.1 to 10 dB dB :STEP [:INCRement] [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC The commands checking the automatic level control are under this node. [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:TABLe[:MEASure]? The command starts a calibration measurement. It fills the level table for the POW:ALC:SEARCH OFF mode. Example: :SOUR:POW:ALC:TABL:MEAS? Answer: 0 [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] ON | OFF | AUTO The command switches level control on or off. ON Level control is permanently switched on. OFF Level control is handled depending on POW:ALC:SEAR described below. AUTO Example: 1125.5555.03 Depending on the operating mode, level control is automatically switched on or off. :SOUR:POW :ALC:STAT ON *RST value is ON 3.144 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:POWer Subsystem [:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:SEARch ON | OFF | ONCE This command is only valid with level control switched off. ON Level control is switched on briefly after a level or frequency change (SAMPLE & HOLD). OFF Level control is never switched on (TABLE mode). ONCE Level control is briefly switched on for calibration. Example: :SOUR:POW :ALC:SEAR ONCE *RST value: ON [:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] -144 to +16 dBm The command sets the RF output level in operating mode CW. UP and DOWN can be indicated in addition to numeric values. Then the level is increased or reduced by the value indicated under :SOURce:POWer:STEP. In this command, the OFFSet value is considered as with input value AMPLITUDE in the LEVEL-LEVEL menu. Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for :POWer:OFFSet = 0. The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Level Offset" as well): -144dBm+ OFFSet to +16dBm +OFFSet The keywords of this command are optional to a large extent, thus the long as well as the short form of the command is shown in the example. *RST value is -30 dBm Example: :SOUR:POW:LEV:IMM:AMPL 15 or :POW 15 [:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet -100 to +100 dB The command enters the constant level offset of a series-connected attenuator/amplifier (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Level Offset"). If a level offset is entered, the level entered using :POWer:AMPLitude does no longer conform to the RF output level. The following connection is true: :POWer = RF output level + POWer:OFFSet. Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level but only the query value of :POWer:AMPLitude. Only dB is permissible as a unit here, linear units (V, W etc.) are not permitted. Caution: The level offset is also valid in the case of level sweeps! Example: :SOUR:POW:LEV:IMM:OFFS 0 or :POW:OFFS 0 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:RCL INCLude | EXCLude The command determines the effect of the recall function on the RF level.*RST value has no effect to this setting. INCLude The saved RF level is loaded when instrument settings are loaded with the [RECALL] key or with a memory sequence. EXCLude The RF level is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded, the current settings are maintained. Example: :SOUR:POW:RCL INCL [:SOURce]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] -144 to + 16 dBm The command limits the maximum Rf output level in operating mode CW and SWEEP. It does not influence the display LEVEL and the answer to query POW?. Example: 1125.5555.03 *RST value is +16 dBm :SOUR:POW:LIM:AMPL 15 3.145 E-9 SOURce:POWer Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:POWer:MANual -144 to +16 dBm The command sets the level if SOURce:POWer:MODE is set to SWEep and SOURce:SWEep:MODE to MANual. Only level values between START and STOP are permissible. (As to specified range, cf. :POWer). *RST value is -30 dBm Example: :SOUR:POW:MAN 1dBm [:SOURce]:POWer:MODE FIXed | SWEep | LIST The command specifies the operating mode and thus also by means of which commands the level setting is checked. FIXed The output level is specified by means of commands under :SOURce:POWer:LEVel. SWEep LIST The instrument operates in the SWEep mode. The level is specified by means of :SOURce:POWer;STARt; STOP; CENTer; SPAN and MANual. The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings. The settings are effected in the SOURce:LIST subsystem. Setting :SOURce:POWer:MODE LIST automatically sets command :SOURce :FREQuency :MODE to LIST as well. Example: *RST value is FIXed :SOUR:POW:MODE FIX [:SOURce]:POWer:PEP? This command returns the peak envelope power in dBm (Digital Modulation and Digital Standards). Example: :POW:PEP? [:SOURce]:POWer:STARt -144 to +16 dBm The command sets the starting value for a level sweep. STARt may be larger than STOP, then the sweep runs from the high to the low level (As to specified range, cf. :POWer:AMPLitude). Example: *RST value is -30dBm :SOUR:POW:STAR -20 [:SOURce]:POWer:STOP -144 to +16 dBm The command sets the final value for a level sweep. STOP may be smaller than STARt. (As to specified range, cf. :POWer:AMPLitude). *RST value is -10dBm Example: :SOUR:POW:STOP 3 [:SOURce]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] 0.1 to 10 dB The command sets the step width with the level setting if UP and DOWN are used as level values. The command is coupled with KNOB STEP in the manual control, i.e., it also specifies the step width of the shaft encoder. Only dB is permissible as a unit here, the linear units (V, W etc.) are not permitted. Example: :SOUR:POW:STEP:INCR 2 *RST value is 1dB 1125.5555.03 3.146 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:PULM Subsystem 3.5.14.22 SOURce:PULM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the external pulse modulation Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :PULM :POLarity NORMal | INVerted :STATe ON | OFF [:SOURce]:PULM:POLarity NORMal | INVerted The command specifies the polarity between modulating and modulated signal. NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during the interpulse period. INVerted The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse. Example: :SOUR:PULM:POL INV *RST value is NORMal [:SOURce]:PULM:STATe ON | OFF The command switches on or off the pulse modulation. Example: :SOUR:PULM:STAT ON 1125.5555.03 3.147 *RST value is OFF E-9 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem SMIQ 3.5.14.23 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the external and internal reference oscillator. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :ROSCillator :EXTernal :FREQuency Hz 1 to 16 MHz [:INTernal] :ADJust [:STATe] ON | OFF :VALue 0 to 4095 :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal The commands to set the external reference oscillator are under this node. [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 1 to 16 MHz The command informs the instrument about at which frequency the external reference oscillator oscillates. Example: :SOUR:ROSC:FREQ 5MHz *RST value is 10 MHz [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal] The commands to set the internal reference oscillator are under this node. [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust The commands for frequency correction (fine adjustment of the frequency) are under this node. [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] ON | OFF The command switches the fine adjustment of the frequency on or off. Example: :SOUR:ROSC:INT:ADJ:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue 0 to 4095 The command indicates the frequency correction value (tuning value). For a detailed definition, cf. Chapter 2, Section "Reference Frequency Internal/External". Example: :SOUR:ROSC:INT:ADJ:VAL 2048 *RST value is 2048 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the reference source. INTernal The internal oscillator is used. EXTernal The reference signal is fed externally. Example: :SOUR:ROSC:SOUR EXT 1125.5555.03 3.148 *RST value is INT E-9 SMIQ SOURce:SWEep Subsystem 3.5.14.24 SOURce:SWEep Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to check the RF sweep, i.e., sweeps of the RF generators. Sweeps are triggered on principle. The frequency sweep is activated by command SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep, the level sweep by command SOURce:POWer:MODE SWEep. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :SWEep NORMal | LONG :BTIMe [:FREQuency] s :DWELl 10 ms to 5 s :MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP :POINts Number :SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic :STEP [:LINear] 0 to 1 GHz Hz :LOGarithmic 0.01 to 50 PCT PCT :DWELl 10 ms to 5 s s :MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP :POINts Number :POWer :STEP [:LOGarithmic] 0 to 10 dB dB [:SOURce]:SWEep:BTIMe NORMal | LONG The command sets the blank time (Blank TIMe) of the sweep. The setting is valid for all sweeps, i.e., also for LF sweeps. NORMal Blank time as short as possible. LONG Blank time long enough to permit an XY recorder to return to 0. Example: :SOUR:SWE:BTIM LONG *RST value is NORM [:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency] The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node. Keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted (cf. examples). The commands are SCPI compatible then unless stated otherwise. [:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl 10 ms to 5 s The command sets the dwell time per frequency step. Example: :SOUR:SWE:DWEL 12ms *RST value is 15 ms [:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep. AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle. MANual Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a SOURce:FREQuency:MANual command, the trigger system is not active. The frequency increases or decreases (depending on the direction of the shaft encoder) by the value indicated under [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STEP:INCRement. STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step (single-step mode). The frequency increases by the value indicated under [:SOURce]:SWEep:STEP:LOGarithmic. Example: 1125.5555.03 *RST value is AUTO :SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO 3.149 E-9 SOURce:SWEep Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts Number The command determines the number of steps in a sweep. Instead of this command, commands SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear and SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LOGarithmic should be used, as SOURce:SWEep :FREQuency:POINts has been adapted to the instrument characteristics in comparison to the SCPI command. The value of POINts depends on SPAN and STEP according to the following formulas.. The following is true for linear sweeps : POINts = SPAN / STEP:LIN + 1 The following is true for logarithmic sweeps and STARt < STOP: POINts = ((log STOP - log STARt) / log (1+ STEP:LOG)) Two independent POINts values are used for SPACing LOG and SPACing LIN. I.e., before POINts is changed, SPACing must be set correctly. A change of POINts results in an adaptation of STEP, but not of STARt, STOP and SPAN. Example: :SOUR:SWE:POIN 100 [:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings. Example: :SOUR:SWE:SPAC LIN *RST value is LIN [:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP The commands to set the step width for linear and logarithmic sweeps. The settings for STEP:LIN and STEP:LOG are independent. [:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] 0 to 1 GHz The command sets the step width with the linear sweep. If STEP[:LINear] is changed, the value of POINts valid for SPACing:LINear also changes according to the formula stated under POINts. A change of SPAN does not result in a change of STEP[:LINear]. Keyword [:LINear] can be omitted, then the command conforms to SCPI regulations (see example). Example: :SOUR:SWE:STEP 1MHz *RST value is 1 MHz [:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic 0.01 to 50 PCT The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated according to new frequency = prior frequency + STEP:LOG x prior frequency (if STARt < STOP) STEP:LOG indicates the fraction of the prior frequency by which this is increased for the next sweep step. Usually STEP:LOG is indicated in percent, with the suffix PCT having to be used explicitly. If STEP:LOG is changed, the value of POINts valid for SPAC:LOG also changes according to the formula stated under POINts. A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP:LOG. Example: :SOUR:SWE:STEP:LOG 10PCT *RST value is 1 PCT [:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl 10 ms to 5 s The command sets the dwell time per level step. Example: :SOUR:SWE:POW:DWEL 12ms 1125.5555.03 3.150 *RST value is 15 ms E-9 SMIQ SOURce:SWEep Subsystem [:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep. AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle. MANual Each level step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a SOURce:POWer:MANual command, the trigger system is not active. The level increases or decreases (depending on the direction of the shaft encoder) by the value stated under :SOURce:POWer:STEP:INCRement. STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step (single-step mode). The level increases by the value indicated under :SOURce:POWer:STEP:INCRement. Example: :SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO *RST value is AUTO [:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:POINts Number The command determines the number of steps in a sweep. Instead of this command, command SOURce:SWEep:POWer:STEP:LOGarithmic should be used, as POINts has been adapted to the instrument characteristics in comparison to the SCPI command. The value of :POINts depends on .SPAN and :STEP according to the following formulas: POINts = ((log STOP - log STARt) / log STEP:LOG) + 1 A change of POINts results in an adaptation of STEP but not of STARt and STOP. Example: :SOUR:SWE:POW:POIN 100 [:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:STEP The commands to set the step width for a sweep are under this node. [:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic] 0 to 10 dB The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next level value of a sweep is calculated according to new level = prior level + STEP:LOG × prior level STEP:LOG indicates the fraction of the prior level by which this is increased for the next sweep step. Usually STEP:LOG is indicated in dB, with suffix dB having to be used explicitly. If STEP:LOG is changed, the value of POINts also changes according to the formula indicated under POINts. A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP:LOG. Keyword :LOG can be omitted, then the command conforms to SCPI regulation (see example). Example: :SOUR:SWE:STEP:LOG 10dB *RST value is 1dB 1125.5555.03 3.151 E-9 SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) SMIQ 3.5.14.25 SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) Note: #H0 to #HF are numerals which are entered in alphanumerical hex syntax in manual operation. SCPI (and IEEE 488.2) allow the octal and binary entry for non-decimal numbers in the following form #H|h <0 to 9, A|a to F|f>, #Q|q <0 to 7> and #B|b <0|1>. However, the hex format is always used for the output generated by a query. Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :WCDMa :STATe ON | OFF :MODE CHAN4 | CHAN8 | CHAN15 :PRESet (without) :CRATe R4M | R8M :LINK DOWN | UP | UPMulti :FORMat QPSK | OQPSK :CRATe :VARiation 100cps to 7.5Mcps :FILTer :TYPe SCOSine | COSine | WCDMa | USER :SELect ‘name‘ :PARameter 0.1 to 0.7 :MODE LACP | LEVM :LDIStortion [:STATe] :SEQuence ON | OFF AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :INHibit 0 to 67108863 :DELay 0 to 65535 :OUTPut[1]| 2 SLOT | RFRame | CSPeriod :DELay 0 to 40959 (81919) :POLarity POSitive | NEGative :CLOCk :SOURce INTernal | EXTernal dBm :POWer? :ADJust query only (without) :MULTicode :STATe ON | OFF :MASTer 0 to 3 :CHANnels #H0 to #HFF :SLENgth 1125.5555.03 1 to 256 3.152 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) Command Parameter Default Unit Remark Þ name {,name}... [:SOURce] :WCDMa :CHANnel<0..14> [:I] | :Q :TYPE PERCh | CCPCh | DPCH | DPDCh | DPCCh | ALLD :SRATe D16 | D32 | D64 | D128 | D256 | D512 | D1024 :SCODe 0 to 511 :LCODe :OFFSet #H0 to #H3FFFF (#H1FFFFFFFFFF) 0 to 40959 (81919) :SCODe :LMS #H0 to #HFF [:I] | :Q -30 to 0 :DATA PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | DLISt :DLISt ‘name’ :OFFSet 0 to 10239 :TPC :DLISt :STATe Note: dB :POWer ZERO | ONE | ALTernate | DLISt ‘name’ ON | OFF The calculation of the W-CDMA sequences is rather time-consuming and should be restarted for any new setting. The WCDMA modulation is therefore switched off for each command (autom. WCDM:STAT OFF performed). The user can then perform several settings without any delay and has to switch on again the WCDMA modulation (with WCDM:STAT ON). The calculations are performed and the previous settings are effective after the command is given. [:SOURce]:WCDMa:STATe ON | OFF The command switches on the modulation in line with the W-CDMA procedure (ARIB standard). Option SMIQB43 is required for this purpose. All other standards that are switched on or the digital modulation are automatically switched to off state. Caution: The command with ON should be used after any :WCDM command or after a series of WCDM commands in order to activate the previous settings. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:WCDMa:MODE CHAN4 | CHAN8 | CHAN15 The command selects the number of code channels. The limitations for setting the power of different channels thus become effective. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:MODE CHAN4 *RST value is CHAN8 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:PRESet The command sets all the following settings to a defined initial state (as after *RST). This ensures that a signal is actually generated and that it is in line with the standard. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:PRES 1125.5555.03 3.153 E-9 SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) SMIQ [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CRATe R4M | R8M The command sets the chip rate (4.096M or 8.192Mcps). R8M is possible only with a certain hardware configuration. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CRAT R4M *RST value is R4M [:SOURce]:WCDMa:LINK DOWN | UP | UPMulti The command selects the mode of the transmitted signal. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:LINK UPM [:SOURce]:WCDMa:FORMat QPSK | OQPSK The command selects the type of modulation (OQPSK: Offset QPSK). Example: :SOUR:WCDM:FORM OQPSK *RST value is DOWN *RST value is QPSK [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CRATe:VARiation 100cps to 7.5Mcps The command selects the modification of the chip-clock frequency set with :WCDM:CRAT R4M | R8M. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CRAT:VAR 1.2M *RST value is 4.096M [:SOURce]:WCDMa:FILTer The commands for selecting the baseband filter are under this node. [:SOURce]:WCDMa:FILTer:TYPe SCOSine | COSine | WCDMa | USER The command selects the type of filter. A filter list should be selected with :WCDM:FILT:SEL 'name' for the filter type USER. SCOSine Square root cosine (root Nyquist) filter COSine Cosine (Nyquist) filter WCDMa Root Nyquist filter with fixed roll-off factor 0.22 USER User defined filter Example: :SOUR:WCDM:FILT:TYP COS *RST value is WCDM [:SOURce]:WCDMa:FILTer:SELect 'name' The command selects a named filter list. The list is used only if a user-defined filter is selected with :WCDM:FILT:TYPE USER. To generate lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SEL, to fill up lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:FILT:SEL 'test' *RST value is NONE [:SOURce]:WCDMa:FILTer:PARameter 0.1... 0.7 The command sets the roll-off factor for the COS filters. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:FILT:PAR 0.5 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:FILTer:MODE LACP | LEVM This command selects one of the "L"ow filter modes. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:FILT:MODE LEVM 1125.5555.03 3.154 *RST value is 0.22 *RST value is LACP E-9 SMIQ SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) [:SOURce]:WCDMa:LDIStortion[:STATe] ON | OFF The command sets the reduced level for the low-distortion mode. ON Low-distortion mode OFF Normal level Example: :SOUR:WCDM:LDIS ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:WCDMa:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the W-CDMA sequence. AUTO Continuously repeated RETRigger Continuously repeated; new start after a trigger AAUTo ARMED AUTO; waits for trigger, then switches over to AUTO and can no longer be triggered ARETrigger ARMED RETRIG; a trigger event is required to start, each new trigger causes a restart Example: :SOUR:WCDM:SEQ AAUT *RST value is RETR [:SOURce]:WCDMa:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering is via remote control using the trigger command or via EXECUTE TRIGGER in case of manual control. EXT The trigger signal is fed in via input TRIGIN INT A start is only possible manually or via the remote control command TRIG:DM:IMM Example: :SOUR:WCDM:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:WCDMa:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67108863 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration (in number of chips). Example: :SOUR:WCDM:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 40959 The command defines the trigger delay (in number of chips). Example: :SOUR:WCDM:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2 SLOT | RFRame | CSPeriod The command defines the output signal at trigger output 1 or 2. The following times can be selected: SLOT Time slot clock RFRame Radio Frame (frame clock) CSPeriod Chip Sequence Period Example: :SOUR:WCDM:TRIG:OUTP1 RFR *RST value is: for OUTPut 1: RFR for OUTPut 2: CSP [:SOURce]:WCDMa:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:POLarity POSitive | NEGative The commands defines the polarity of the signals at the trigger outputs. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:TRIG:OUTP2:POL NEG 1125.5555.03 3.155 *RST value is POS E-9 SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) [:SOURce]:WCDMa:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:DELay 0 to 40959 (81919) The command defines the delay of trigger signals in chips. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 50 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the clock source. INTernal The internal clock generator is used. EXTernal The clock is fed externally via connector SYMBOL CLOCK. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CLOC:SOUR EXT SMIQ *RST value is 0 *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:WCDMa:POWer? The command queries the total power for the W-CDMA signal. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:POW? [:SOURce]:WCDMa:POWer:ADJust The command modifies the power of each active code channel. This means that the total power is set equal to the power in the level display. The command triggers an action and hence has no *RST value assigned. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:POW:ADJ [:SOURce]:WCDMa:MULTicode The commands for selecting multicode settings (not available with :WCDM:LINK UPMulti) are under this node. [:SOURce]:WCDMa:MULTicode:STATe ON | OFF The command permits to switch on or off the multicode mode. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:MULT:STAT OFF [:SOURce]:WCDMa:MULTicode:MASTer 0 to 3 The command selects the master channel for the spread code. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:MULT:MAST 3 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:MULTicode:CHANnels #H0 to #HFF The command permits to select the channels for the multicode transmission. Each set bit in the 15-bit hex figure corresponds to a set channel. The figure 9, for example, switches on channel 0 (binary significance) and channel 3 (significance 8). Example: :SOUR:WCDM:MULT:CHAN #H3A [:SOURce]:WCDMa:SLENgth 1 to 256 The command determines the length of the calculated chip sequence in number of frames. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:SLEN 8 1125.5555.03 3.156 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>[:I]|:Q The commands for determining the channel configuration are under this node. For the sense of transmission DOWN (:WCDM:LINK DOWN) the settings cannot be separately set to I and Q component; :I and :Q need not be specified. Example: :WCDM:CHAN2:TYPE PERC For UP, however, there is the multiplex setting (UPMulti) with which settings are distinguished between I and Q. :I is optional, :I is used if no indication is made. Example: :WCDM:CHAN2:I:TYPE PERC has the same meaning as :WCDM:CHAN2:TYPE PERC Example for Q-component setting: :WCDM:CHAN2:Q:TYPE PERC There are some commands which do not make a distinction between I and Q: :WCDM:CHAN<0...14>:LCOD :WCDM:CHAN<0...14>:LCOD OFFS :WCDM:CHAN<0...14>:SCOD:LMS [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>[:I]|:Q:TYPE PERCh | CCPCh | DPCH | DPDCh | DPCCh | ALLD The command selects the channel type. PERCh Perch Channel (only for :WCDM:LINK DOWN) CCPCh Common Control Physical Channel (not for :WCDM:LINK UPM) DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel (not for :WCDM:LINK UPM) ALLD All Data (not for :WCDM:LINK UPM) DPDCh Dedicated Physical Data Channel (only for :WCDM:LINK UPM) DPCCh Dedicated Physical Control Channel (only for :WCDM:LINK UPM) Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:I:TYPE PERC *RST value is DPCH *RST value is PERC for channel 0, mode 8, downlink [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>[:I]|:Q:SRATe D16 | D32 | D64 | D128 | D256 | D512 | D1024 The command determines the symbol rate. The values depend on the channel type. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:I:SRAT D64 *RST value is D32 *RST value is 16 for channel 0, mode 8, downlink [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>[:I]|:Q:SCODe 0 to 511 The command is used to set the short code of the spread code. The upper limit depends on :WCDM:CRAT, :WCDM:SRAT and :WCDM:CHAN:TYPE. Example: *RST value is ( +9) :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:I:SCOD 123 *RST value is 0 for channel 0, mode 8, downlink :SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>:LCODe #H0 to #H3FFFF (#H1FFFFFFFFFF) The command determines the long code of the spread code. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:LCOD #H3FFF *RST value is #H1 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>:LCODe:OFFSet 0 to 40959 (81919) The command is used to set the long code offset of the spread code. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:LCOD:OFFS 345 1125.5555.03 3.157 *RST value is 0 E-9 SOURce:WCDMa Subsystem (NTT DoCoMo/ARIB 0.0) SMIQ [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>:SCODe:LMS #H0 to #HFF The command determines the short code index used for the spreading of the long code mask symbols (LMS). Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:SCOD:LMS #H3F *RST value is #H1 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>[:I]|:Q:POWer -30dB to 0dB The command determines the power of a channel in relation to the power indication on the level display. Setting limitations are to be observed with respect to :WCDM:MODE CHANx. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:I:POW -22 DB *RST value is -9 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>[:I]|:Q:DATA PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | DLISt The command is used to determine the data source for the data field. PNx are PRBS data and DLISt data from a list previously defined. It is selected with the following command. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:I:DATA DLIS *RST value is PN15 [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>[:I]|:Q:DATA:DLISt ’name’ The command selects the data list used with :WCDM:CHAN:DATA DLIS. The command has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:I:DATA:DLIS ’test2’ [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>[:I]|:Q:DATA:OFFSet 0 to 10239 The command is used to set the data offset (unit symbol duration). It shifts the modulation data with respect to the spread code. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:I:DATA:OFFS 345 *RST value is ( * 3) *RST value is 0 for channel 0, mode 8, downlink [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<1...14>:TPC ZERO | ONE | ALTernate | DLISt The command determines the data source for the TPC field in channel types DPCH and DPCCh. ZERO 0000..., sequence of zeros ONE 1111..., sequence of ones ALT alternating sequence DLISt Data from a list previously defined. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:TPC DLIS *RST value is ALT [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<1...14>:TPC:DLISt ’name The command selects the data list used with :WCDM:CHAN:TPC DLIS. The command has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN2:TPC DLIS ’test1’ [:SOURce]:WCDMa:CHANnel<0...14>:STATe ON | OFF Switches the assigned code channel on or off. Example: :SOUR:WCDM:CHAN12:STAT ON 1125.5555.03 3.158 *RST value is ON E-9 SMIQ SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem 3.5.14.26 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem Note: #H0 to #HF are numerals which are entered in alphanumerical hex syntax in manual operation. #B0|1 are numerals in binary syntax. SCPI (and IEEE 488.2) allow entries of all forms for non-decimal numbers #H|h <0 to 9, A|a to F|f>, #Q|q <0 to 7> and #B|b <0|1>. However, the format of manual operation is always used for the output generated by a query. Command [:SOURce] :W3GPp :CALCulate :PROGress? :STATe :PRESet :SETTing :CATalog? :LOAD :TMODel :STORe :DELete :TMODel [:BST] :CATalog? :MST :CATalog? :GPP3 :VERSion? :CRATe? :LINK :SLENgth :CLIPping :LEVel :FILTer :TYPe :SELect :PARameter :MODE :CRATe :VARiation :PPARameter :SCHannels :SCCPch :STATe :SRATe :DPCH :COUNt :SRATe :CRESt :EXECute :ENHanced :OCNS :ADDitional 1125.5555.03 Parameter Default Unit % Remark Query only ON | OFF (without) Þ name {,name} ‘name‘ ‘name‘ ‘name‘ ‘name‘ Query only 'name' Þ name {,name} 'name' Þ name {,name} Query only Query only Þ V340 Þ R3M84 FORWard | REVerse (Alias DOWN | UP) 1 to 13 (Frames) 1 to 100 PCT Query only Query only SCOSine | COSine | WCDMa | USER 'name' 0.1 to 0.99 LACP | LEVM 100Hz to 18 MHz Hz (c/s) ON | OFF ON | OFF D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K 0 to 512 D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K MINimum | AVERage | WORSt (without) (only with SMIQB48, WCDMA Enhanced Channels) (only with SMIQB48, WCDMA Enhanced Channels) (only with SMIQB48, WCDMA Enhanced Channels) 3.159 Only for LINK DOWN Only for LINK UP E-9 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem Command SMIQ Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :W3GPp :COPY :SOURce :DESTination :COFFset :EXECute :SEQuence 1 to 4 1 to 4 0 to 511 (without) AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger Only for LINK DOWN :TRIGger :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :DELay 0 to 38399 (chips) :INHibit 0 to 67108863 (chips) :OUTPut[1]|2 SLOT | RFRame | CSPeriod | ECSPeriod :POLarity POS | NEG :DELay 0 to 38399 (chips) :CLOCk :SOURce EXTernal | INTernal :MODE CHIP | CHIP4 :DELay 0 to 0.99 (chips) :POWer? dB :ADJust :BSTation with i = [1] | 2 | 3 | 4 :STATe ON | OFF :SCODe #H0 to #H5FFF :STATe :TFCI Query only (without) Base station ON | OFF 0 to 1023 :STATE :SSCG? ON | OFF Þ 0 to 63 query only :TPC :READ CONTinuous | S0A | S1A | S01A | S10A :MISuse ON | OFF :POWer :STEP -10 to +10 dB :TRANsmit :DIVersity OFF | ANT1 | ANT2 :PINDicator :COUNt D18 | D36 | D72 | D144 :MCHannel Multichannel :STARt 11 to 138 :STOP 11 to 138 :SRATe D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K :PLENgth BIT2 | BIT4 | BIT8 | BIT16 :CCODe 0 to (511) :STEP :POWer :STEP :DATA :PATTern 1125.5555.03 (S/s) 0 to (511) -60 to 0 dB -60 to +60 dB PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | ZERO | ONE | PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 3.160 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem Command Parameter Default Unit Remark [:SOURce] :W3GPp :MCHannel Multichannel :TIMing :OFFSet 0 to 149 :STEP 0 to 149 :TPC ZERO | ONE | PATTern :PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 :MCODe ON | OFF :STATe ON | OFF :BSTation with i = [1] | 2 | 3 | 4 Base station :MCHannel :EXECute Multichannel (without) :ENHanced (only with SMIQB48, WCDMA Enhanced Channels) :OCNS (only with SMIQB48, WCDMA Enhanced Channels) :CHANnel with n = 0 | [1] | 2 to 138 :SRATe D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | (S/s) D960K :CCODe 0 to (511) :POWer -60.0 to 0 :DATA PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | ZERO | ONE | PATTern :PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 :TOFFset 0 to 149 :PLENgth BIT2 | BIT4 | BIT8 | BIT16 :TPC :PATTern ZERO | ONE | PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 :MCODe ON | OFF :STATe ON | OFF :DOMain :ERRor? :MSTation ON | OFF Þ0|1 Query only with i = [1] | 2 | 3 | 4 Mobile station :STATe ON | OFF :MODE PRACh | PCPCh | DPCDch :SCODe :MODE dB #H0 to #HFFFFFF LONG | SHORt | OFF :TPC :DATA ZERO | ONE | PATTern (| DLISt) :PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 :READ CONTinuous | S0A | S1A | S01A | S10A :PRACh :PREPetition 1 to 10 :PPOWer -60 to 0 dB :DPOWer -60 to 0 dB :CPOWer -60 to 0 dB :MLENgth 1|2 :SIGNature 0 to 15 :ASLot 0 to 14 :SRATe D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K 1125.5555.03 Message part 3.161 E-9 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem Command SMIQ Parameter [:SOURce] :W3GPp :MSTation :PRACh :DATA :PATTern :TFCI :PCPCh :PREPetition :PPOWer :STEP :DPOWer :CPOWer :MLENgth :PLENgth :SIGNature :ASLOt :FBI :MODE :DATA :PATTern :SRATe :DATA :PATTern :TFCI :DPCCh :POWer :TOFFset? :TFCI :STATe :FBI :MODE :DATA :PATTern :TPC :MISuse :PSTep :ENHanced :ADDitional :DPDCh :ORATe :POWer :DPDCh :SRATe? :TYPE? :CCODe? :DATA :PATTern 1125.5555.03 Default Unit with i = [1] | 2 | 3 | 4 Remark Mobile station PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | ZERO | ONE | PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 0 to 1023 1 to 10 -60 to 0 0 to +10 -60 to 0 -60 to 0 1 to 10 S0 | S8 0 to 15 0 to 14 dB dB dB dB Power Control Preamble OFF | D1B | D2B ZERO | ONE | PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | ZERO | ONE | PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 0 to 1023 -60 to 0 Þ 0 to 1023 ON | OFF dB Query only OFF | D1B | D2B ZERO | ONE | PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 ON | OFF -10 to 10 (only with SMIQB48, WCDMA Enhanced Channels) (only with SMIQB48, WCDMA Enhanced Channels) D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K | X2 | X3 | X4 | X5 | X6 -60.0 to 0 with j = [1] | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 Þ D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K Þ Þ PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | ZERO | ONE | PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 3.162 dB Only for LINK UP dB Query only Query only Query only E-9 SMIQ Note: SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem The calculation of the W-CDMA sequences is rather time-consuming and should be restarted for any new setting. The WCDMA modulation is therefore switched off for each command (autom. :SOUR:W3GP:STAT OFF performed). The user can then perform several settings without any delay and has to switch on again the WCDMA modulation (with :SOUR:W3GP:STAT ON). The calculations are performed and the previous settings are effective after the command is given. [:SOURce]:W3GPp:CALCulate:PROGress? The command queries the calculation status. The value is returned in percent. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:CALC:PROG [:SOURce]:W3GPp:STATe ON | OFF The command switches on the modulation in line with the W-CDMA procedure (3GPP standard). Option SMIQB45 is required for this purpose. All other standards that are switched on or the digital modulation are automatically switched to off state. Caution: The command with ON should be used after any :SOUR:W3GP command or after a series of W3GP commands in order to activate the previous settings. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:STAT ON (or :SOUR:W3GP:STAT ON) *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PRESet The command sets all the following settings to a defined initial state (as after *RST). This ensures that a signal is actually generated and that it is in line with the standard. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:PRES [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:CATalog? Þ‘name‘ The command returns a list of all user-defined sequence configurations. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SETT:CAT? Response: 'test1','test2' [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:LOAD ‘name of sequence’ The command loads a user-defined sequence configuration. The name may have a maximum number of 8 characters. This command triggers an action and hence has no *RST value. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SETT:LOAD ’test’ [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:STORe ‘name of sequence’ The command stores a current sequence configuration under a name. The name may contain a maximum of 8 letters. This command triggers an action and so has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SETT:STOR ’test’ 1125.5555.03 3.163 E-9 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:DELete ‘name of sequence’ The command deletes the specified sequence configuration. This command triggers an action and so has no *RST value and no query. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SETT:DEL ’test1’ [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel The commands for default setting (test models) are under this node. [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel[:BST] 'name' The command loads a default setting (test model) defined in 3GPP standard TS25.141 for the base station, i.e. for link direction FORW. This command triggers an action and hence has no *RST value. TEST1_16 Spectrum emission mask ACLR; 16 Channels) TEST1_32 Spectrum emission mask ACLR; 32 Channels) TEST1_64 Spectrum emission mask ACLR; 64 Channels) TEST2 Output power dynamics TEST3_16 Peak code domain error; 16 Channels TEST3_32 Peak code domain error; 32 Channels TEST4 Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SETT:TMOD 'TEST1_32' [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel[:BST]:CATalog? The command returns a list of all the available test models for the base station, i.e. for link direction FORW. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SETT:TMOD:CAT? [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MST 'name' The command loads a non-standardized default setting (test model) for the mobile station, i.e. for link direction REV. This command triggers an action and hence has no *RST value. ‚C+D 60K ‚C+D960K Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SETT:TMOD:MST'C+D 60K' [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel[:MST]:CATalog? The command returns a list of all the available test models for the mobile station, i.e. for link direction REV. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SETT:TMOD:MST:CAT? [:SOURce]:W3GPp:GPP3:VERSion? The command queries the version. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:GPP3:VERS? Response: (V3420) [:SOURce]:W3GPp:CRATe? The command queries the chip rate. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:CRAT? 1125.5555.03 Response: (R3M84) 3.164 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem [:SOURce]:W3GPp:LINK FORWard | REVerse The command selects the mode of the transmitted signal (sense of transmission). The signal either corresponds to that of a base station (FORWard, alias DOWN) or a mobile station (REVerse, alias UP). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:LINK REV *RST value is FORW [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SLENgth 1 to 13 The command defines the length of the calculated chip sequence as a number of frames. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SLEN 8 *RST value is 1 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:CLIPping:LEVel 1 to 100PCT The command limits the output level (referred to the unlimited level). Can only be set if the Enhanced Channels are switched off. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:CLIP:LEV 95 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:FILTer:TYPe SCOSine | COSine | WCDMa | USER The command selects the filter type. A filter list should be selected with :W3GP:FILT:SEL 'name' for the filter type USER. SCOSine square root cosine (root Nyquist) filter COSine cosine (Nyquist) filter WCDMa root Nyquist filter with fixed roll-off factor 0.22 USER user-defined list Example: :SOUR:W3GP:FILT:TYP COS *RST value is WCDM [:SOURce]:W3GPp:FILTer:SELect 'name' The command selects a named filter list. The list is used only if a user-defined filter is selected with :W3GPp:FILT:TYPE USER. To generate lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:SEL, to fill up lists, cf. command [:SOURce]:DM:FLISt:DATA. Example: :SOUR:SOUR:W3GP:FILT:SEL 'test' *RST value is NONE [:SOURce]:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter 0.1 to 0.99 The command sets the roll-off factor for the COS and SCOS filters. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:FILT:PAR 0.5 1125.5555.03 3.165 *RST value is 0.22 E-9 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:W3GPp:FILTer:MODE LACP | LEVM This command selects one of the "L"ow filter modes (LACP: lowest adjacent channel power, LEVM: lowest error vector). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:FILT:MODE LEVM *RST value is LACP [:SOURce]:W3GPp:CRATe:VARiation 100 Hz to 18 MHz (cps) The command selects the variation for the chip rate frequency (as against that set with :SOUR:W3GP:CRAT). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:CRAT:VAR 1.2MHz *RST value is 3.84M [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PPARameter The commands for the parameterizable predefined settings are under this node. The channel table is filled (preset) with the following parameters, if the :SOUR:W3GP:PPAR:EXEC action command is executed. [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCHannels ON | OFF The channels (P-CPICH, P-SCH, S-SCH, PCCPCH) required for the synchronization of the mobile are switched on (ON) or remain unused (OFF). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:PPAR:SCH OFF *RST value is ON [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:STATe ON | OFF SCCPCH is used in the scenario (ON) or remains unused (OFF). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:PPAR:SCCP:STAT OFF *RST value is ON [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:SRATe D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K The symbol rate of S-CCPCH is set. The permissible rates depend on the channel type. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:PPAR:SCCP:SRATE D120K *RST value is D60K [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:COUNt 0 to 512 The command sets the number of DPCH channels. The maximum number depends on the chip rate and the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:PPAR:DPCH:COUN 16 *RST value is 3 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PPARameter:SRATe D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K The command sets the symbol rate of DPCH channels. The permissible rates depend on the type of channel. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:PPAR:SRAT D240K *RST value is D30K [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PPARameter:CRESt MINimum | AVERage | WORSt The command sets the crest factor. MIN sets the timing offset and channelization code so that they are minimized. An average value is generated with AVG, the highest value of the crest factor with MAX. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:PPAR:CRES WORS *RST value is MIN [:SOURce]:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute This action command fills (presets) the channel table with the above parameters. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:PPAR:EXEC 1125.5555.03 3.166 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem [:SOURce]:W3GPp:COPY The commands for copying the setting of a mobile or base station to the data record of another are under this node. The :SOUR:W3GP:COPY:EXEC command starts copying. [:SOURce]:W3GPp:COPY:SOURce 1 to 4 The command selects the station whose data are to be copied. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:COPY:SOUR 2 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:COPY:DESTination 1 to 4 The command selects the station to which data are to be copied. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:COPY:DEST 3 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:COPY:COFFset 0 to 511 The command sets the offset value for the channelization code in the target station. This command is only available under :SOUR:W3GP:LINK FORW/DOWN. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:COPY:SOFF 100 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:COPY:EXECute The command starts copying. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:COPY:EXEC [:SOURce]:W3GPp:SEQuence AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger The command selects the trigger mode for the W-CDMA sequence. AUTO Continuously repeated RETRigger Continuously repeated; new start after a trigger AAUTo ARMED AUTO; waits for trigger, then switches over to AUTO and can no longer be triggered ARETrigger ARMED RETRIG; a trigger event is required to start, each new trigger causes a restart Example: :SOUR:W3GP:SEQ AAUT *RST value is RETR [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal The command selects the trigger source. With INT selected, triggering is via remote control using the trigger command or via EXECUTE TRIGGER in case of manual control. EXT The trigger signal is fed in via input TRIGIN INT A start is only possible manually or via the remote control command TRIG:DM:IMM Example: :SOUR:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR EXT *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger:DELay 0 to 38399 The command defines the trigger delay (in number of chips). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:TRIG:DEL 200 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger:INHibit 0 to 67108863 The command sets the retrigger inhibit duration (in number of chips). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:TRIG:INH 1000 *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.167 E-9 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2 SLOT | RFRame | CSPeriod | ECSPeriod | SFNR The command defines the output signal at trigger output 1 or 2. The following times can be selected: SLOT Time slot clock RFRame Radio Frame (frame clock) CSPeriod Chip Sequence Period ECSPeriod Enhanced Chip Sequence Period (only with option SMIQB48) SFNR P-CCPCH/BCH SFN Restart Example: :SOUR:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP RFR *RST value is: for OUTPut 1: RFR for OUTPut 2: CSP [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:POLarity POSitive | NEGative The commands defines the polarity of the signals at the trigger outputs. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP2:POL NEG [:SOURce]:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut[1]|2:DELay 0 to 38399 The command defines the delay of trigger signals in chips. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 50 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal The command selects the clock source. INTernal The internal clock generator is used. EXTernal The clock is fed externally via connector SYMBOL CLOCK. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:CLOC:SOUR EXT *RST value is POS *RST value is 0 *RST value is INT [:SOURce]:W3GPp:CLOCk:MODE CHIP | CHIP4 The command selects the clock rate for the external chip clock. With CHIP4, the clock has four times the rate. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:CLOC:MODE CHIP4 *RST value is CHIP [:SOURce]:W3GPp:CLOCk:DELay 0 to 0.99 The command sets the delay of the clock signal in chips. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:CLOC:DEL 0.5 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:POWer? The command queries the total power for the W-CDMA signal. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:POW? [:SOURce]:W3GPp:POWer:ADJust The command changes the power of the activated code channels. The total power then equals the power shown by the Level display (total power). This command triggers an action and so has no *RST value and no query form. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:POW:ADJ [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation where i = [1] | 2 | 3 | 4 This node comprises commands for one of the 4 base stations. They are only effective if the link direction is set to FORW. (:SOUR:W3GP:LINK FORW). 1125.5555.03 3.168 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:STATe ON | OFF The command activates the station with ON and deactivates it with OFF. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST2:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:SCODe #H0 to #H5FFF The command sets the scrambling coder of a station. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:SCOD #H1234 *RST value is #H0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:SCODe:STATe #H0 to #H5FFF The command sets the Scrambling Code of a station. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:SCOD #H1234 *RST value is #H0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:TFCI 0 to 1023 The command sets the value of the transport format identifier. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST2:TFCI 22 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:TFCI:STATe ON | OFF The command activates the transport format identifier (ON) or deactivates it (OFF). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST3:TFCI:STAT ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:SSCG? The command queries the 2nd search code group (PERCH). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST4:SSCG? [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:TPC:READ CONTinuous | S0A | S1A | S01A | S10A The command sets the read-out mode for the TPC pattern. CONTinuous TPC is used cyclically. S0A TPC is used once, followed by 0 bits. S1A TPC is used once, followed by 1 bits. S01A TPC is used once, followed by alternating 01 bits. S10A TPC is used once, followed by alternating 10 bits. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:TPC:READ S01A *RST value is CONT [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:TPC:MISuse ON | OFF The command sets the misuse of the TPC pattern of each channel for the channel power control. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:TPC:MIS ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:TPC:POWer:STEP -10.0 to 10.0 dB The command sets the channel-power step width when option :SOUR:W3GP:BST:MIS:TPC ON is active. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:TPC:POW:STEP 3.1 *RST value is 0 1125.5555.03 3.169 E-9 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:TRANsmit:DIVersity OFF | ANT1 | ANT2 This command sets the calculation of the signal without transmit diversity (OFF) or for antenna 1, or antenna 2 (SCH channels with TSTD mode, other channels with STTD mode). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:TRAN:DIV ANT2 *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:PINDicator:COUNt D18 | D36 | D72 | D144 The command sets the number of PI in the page indicator channel (PICH). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:PIND:COUN D16 *RST value is 18 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel The commands for the common setting of several DPCH channels are under this node (multichannel). All channels with the numbers between start and stop are simultaneously set to the value of the following commands by means of the :SOUR:W3GP:BST:MCH:EXEC action command. [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:STARt 11 to 138 The command specifies the initial channel of the group with common setting. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:STAR 12 *RST value is 11 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:STOP 11 to 138 The command specifies the end channel of the group with common setting. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:STOP 129 *RST value is 11 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:SRATe D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K This command defines the symbol rate. The values depend on the channel type. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:SRAT D60K *RST value is D30K [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:PLENgth Bit2 | Bit4 | Bit8 | Bit16 The command sets the length of the pilot field in bits. The range of values depends on the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:PLEN BIT2 *RST value is BIT4 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:CCODe 0 to (511) This command sets the channel code. The upper limit depends on the channel type and the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:CCOD 123 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:CCODe:STEP 0 to (511) This command sets the step width of the channel code. The upper limit depends on the channel type and the symbol rate. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:CCOD:STEP 123 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:POWer –60 dB to 0 dB The power of a channel compared to the powers of other channels is determined. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:POW -22DB *RST value is 0 dB 1125.5555.03 3.170 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:POWer:STEP –60 dB to +60 dB The step width for the power of a channel compared to the powers of other channels is determined. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:POW:STEP -22DB *RST value is 0 dB [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:DATA PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | ZERO | ONE | PATTern This command defines the data source for the data field. PNx is PRBS data and PATT is a pattern which is set with the following command. ZERO sets all bits to 0, ONE sets all bits to 1. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:DATA PATT *RST value is PN15 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:DATA:PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 This command sets the pattern which is used under :SOUR:W3GP:BST3:MCH:DATA PATT. The first parameter sets the bit pattern (optionally Hex, Oct or Bin syntax), the second one indicates the number of bits to be used. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:DATA:PATT #H3F, 8 *RST value is #H0, 1 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:TIMing:OFFSet 0 to 149 This command sets the timing offset. It offsets the modulation data with respect to the scrambling code. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:TIM:OFFS 345 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:TIMing:OFFSet:STEP 0 to 149 This command sets the step width of the timing offset. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:TIM:OFFS:STEP 345 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:TPC ZERO | ONE | PATTern This command defines the data source for the TPC field in DPCH. ZERO 0000..., sequence of zeroes ONE 1111..., sequence of ones PATTern bit pattern set with the following command Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:TPC PATT *RST value is 0 *RST value is ZERO [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:TPC:PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 This command sets the bit pattern which is used under :SOUR:W3GP:BST3:MCHan:TPC PATT. The first parameter sets the bit pattern (optionally Hex, Oct or Bin syntax), the second one indicates the number of bits to be used. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:TPC:PATT #H3F, 8 *RST value is #H0, 1 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:MCODe ON | OFF The command activates the multicode for the channel (ON) or deactivates it (OFF). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:MCOD ON *RST value is OFF [:SOURce]:W3GPp:MCHannel:STATe ON | OFF The command activates the code channels (ON) or deactivates them (OFF). Example: :SOUR:W3GP:MCH:STAT OFF 1125.5555.03 3.171 *RST value is ON E-9 SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem SMIQ [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:MCHannel:EXECute All channels with the numbers between start and stop are simultaneously set to the value of the above :SOUR:W3GP:MCH commands. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST3:MCH:EXEC [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced.... The commands for setting the enhanced functions for the 3GPP W-CDMA standard are under this node. These commands are only available if option SMIQB48 is installed. For further information see remote-control commands of this option. [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS.... The commands for simulating the orthogonal channel noise are under this node. These commands are only available if option SMIQB48 is installed. For further information see manual on remote-control commands of this option. [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel with n = 0 | [1] | 2 to 138 The commands for determining the channel configuration are under this node. Suffix 1 is optional. For channels 0 to 10 not all commands are available (settable). [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel :SRATe D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120K | D240K | D480K | D960K This command defines the symbol rate. The permissible rates depend on the type of channel. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:CHAN2:SRAT D60K *RST value is mostly D15K (see manual control) [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel :CCODe 0 to 511 This command sets the channelization code. The upper limit depends on the symbol rate and the channel type and cannot be set for P-SCH and S-SCH. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST1:CHAN3:CCOD 123 *RST value is mostly 0 (see manual control) [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel :POWer –60 dB to 0 dB The power of a channel compared to the powers of other channels is determined. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST2:CHAN4:POW -22DB *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel :DATA PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | ZERO | ONE | PATTern This command defines the data source for the data field. PNx is PRBS data and PATT is a pattern which is set with the following command. ZERO sets all bits to 0, ONE sets all bits to 1. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST3:CHAN5:DATA PATT *RST value is PN15 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel :DATA:PATTern #B0 to B111..1, 1 to 24 This command sets the pattern which is used under :SOUR:W3GP:BST:CHAN:DATA PATT. The first parameter sets the bit pattern (optionally Hex, Oct or Bin syntax), the second one indicates the number of bits to be used. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST:CHAN2:DATA:PATT #H3F, 8 *RST value is #H0, 1 1125.5555.03 3.172 E-9 SMIQ SOURce:W3GPp-Subsystem [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel :TOFFset 0 to 149 This command sets the timing offset. It offsets the modulation data with respect to the scrambling code. Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST2:CHAN6:TOFF 345 *RST value is 0 [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel :TPC ZERO | ONE | PATTern This command defines the data source for the TPC field in DPCH. ZERO 0000..., sequence of zeroes ONE 1111..., sequence of ones PATTern bit pattern set with the following command Example: :SOUR:W3GP:BST3:CHAN7:TPC PATT *RST value is ZERO [:SOURce]:W3GPp:BSTation:CHANnel